US20210286200A1 - Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics - Google Patents

Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20210286200A1
US20210286200A1 US17/127,746 US202017127746A US2021286200A1 US 20210286200 A1 US20210286200 A1 US 20210286200A1 US 202017127746 A US202017127746 A US 202017127746A US 2021286200 A1 US2021286200 A1 US 2021286200A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
fiber
powder
length
optical
heat
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US17/127,746
Inventor
Ken Gross
Brian Victor
Robert Martinsen
Dahv A.V. Kliner
Roger Farrow
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
NLight Inc
Original Assignee
NLight Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=59054235&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20210286200(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by NLight Inc filed Critical NLight Inc
Priority to US17/127,746 priority Critical patent/US20210286200A1/en
Assigned to NLIGHT, INC. reassignment NLIGHT, INC. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: NLIGHT PHOTONICS CORPORATION
Assigned to NLIGHT PHOTONICS CORPORATION reassignment NLIGHT PHOTONICS CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MARTINSEN, ROBERT, FARROW, ROGER, GROSS, KEN, KLINER, DAHV A.V., Victor, Brian
Publication of US20210286200A1 publication Critical patent/US20210286200A1/en
Assigned to PACIFIC WESTERN BANK reassignment PACIFIC WESTERN BANK SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: NLIGHT, INC.
Priority to US17/854,933 priority patent/US11886053B2/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/09Beam shaping, e.g. changing the cross-sectional area, not otherwise provided for
    • G02B27/0927Systems for changing the beam intensity distribution, e.g. Gaussian to top-hat
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F10/00Additive manufacturing of workpieces or articles from metallic powder
    • B22F10/20Direct sintering or melting
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F10/00Additive manufacturing of workpieces or articles from metallic powder
    • B22F10/30Process control
    • B22F10/31Calibration of process steps or apparatus settings, e.g. before or during manufacturing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F10/00Additive manufacturing of workpieces or articles from metallic powder
    • B22F10/30Process control
    • B22F10/36Process control of energy beam parameters
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F12/00Apparatus or devices specially adapted for additive manufacturing; Auxiliary means for additive manufacturing; Combinations of additive manufacturing apparatus or devices with other processing apparatus or devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F3/00Manufacture of workpieces or articles from metallic powder characterised by the manner of compacting or sintering; Apparatus specially adapted therefor ; Presses and furnaces
    • B22F3/10Sintering only
    • B22F3/11Making porous workpieces or articles
    • B22F3/1103Making porous workpieces or articles with particular physical characteristics
    • B22F3/1109Inhomogenous pore distribution
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F3/00Manufacture of workpieces or articles from metallic powder characterised by the manner of compacting or sintering; Apparatus specially adapted therefor ; Presses and furnaces
    • B22F3/24After-treatment of workpieces or articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/03Observing, e.g. monitoring, the workpiece
    • B23K26/032Observing, e.g. monitoring, the workpiece using optical means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/03Observing, e.g. monitoring, the workpiece
    • B23K26/034Observing the temperature of the workpiece
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/03Observing, e.g. monitoring, the workpiece
    • B23K26/0342Observing magnetic fields related to the workpiece
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/06Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/06Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing
    • B23K26/062Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing by direct control of the laser beam
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/06Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing
    • B23K26/064Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing by means of optical elements, e.g. lenses, mirrors or prisms
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/06Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing
    • B23K26/067Dividing the beam into multiple beams, e.g. multifocusing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/02Positioning or observing the workpiece, e.g. with respect to the point of impact; Aligning, aiming or focusing the laser beam
    • B23K26/06Shaping the laser beam, e.g. by masks or multi-focusing
    • B23K26/073Shaping the laser spot
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/20Bonding
    • B23K26/21Bonding by welding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/34Laser welding for purposes other than joining
    • B23K26/342Build-up welding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/36Removing material
    • B23K26/38Removing material by boring or cutting
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/70Auxiliary operations or equipment
    • B23K26/702Auxiliary equipment
    • B23K26/704Beam dispersers, e.g. beam wells
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C48/00Extrusion moulding, i.e. expressing the moulding material through a die or nozzle which imparts the desired form; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C48/03Extrusion moulding, i.e. expressing the moulding material through a die or nozzle which imparts the desired form; Apparatus therefor characterised by the shape of the extruded material at extrusion
    • B29C48/07Flat, e.g. panels
    • B29C48/08Flat, e.g. panels flexible, e.g. films
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C64/00Additive manufacturing, i.e. manufacturing of three-dimensional [3D] objects by additive deposition, additive agglomeration or additive layering, e.g. by 3D printing, stereolithography or selective laser sintering
    • B29C64/10Processes of additive manufacturing
    • B29C64/141Processes of additive manufacturing using only solid materials
    • B29C64/153Processes of additive manufacturing using only solid materials using layers of powder being selectively joined, e.g. by selective laser sintering or melting
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C64/00Additive manufacturing, i.e. manufacturing of three-dimensional [3D] objects by additive deposition, additive agglomeration or additive layering, e.g. by 3D printing, stereolithography or selective laser sintering
    • B29C64/20Apparatus for additive manufacturing; Details thereof or accessories therefor
    • B29C64/264Arrangements for irradiation
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B33ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
    • B33YADDITIVE MANUFACTURING, i.e. MANUFACTURING OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL [3-D] OBJECTS BY ADDITIVE DEPOSITION, ADDITIVE AGGLOMERATION OR ADDITIVE LAYERING, e.g. BY 3-D PRINTING, STEREOLITHOGRAPHY OR SELECTIVE LASER SINTERING
    • B33Y10/00Processes of additive manufacturing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B33ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
    • B33YADDITIVE MANUFACTURING, i.e. MANUFACTURING OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL [3-D] OBJECTS BY ADDITIVE DEPOSITION, ADDITIVE AGGLOMERATION OR ADDITIVE LAYERING, e.g. BY 3-D PRINTING, STEREOLITHOGRAPHY OR SELECTIVE LASER SINTERING
    • B33Y30/00Apparatus for additive manufacturing; Details thereof or accessories therefor
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B33ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
    • B33YADDITIVE MANUFACTURING, i.e. MANUFACTURING OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL [3-D] OBJECTS BY ADDITIVE DEPOSITION, ADDITIVE AGGLOMERATION OR ADDITIVE LAYERING, e.g. BY 3-D PRINTING, STEREOLITHOGRAPHY OR SELECTIVE LASER SINTERING
    • B33Y50/00Data acquisition or data processing for additive manufacturing
    • B33Y50/02Data acquisition or data processing for additive manufacturing for controlling or regulating additive manufacturing processes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/09Beam shaping, e.g. changing the cross-sectional area, not otherwise provided for
    • G02B27/0933Systems for active beam shaping by rapid movement of an element
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/09Beam shaping, e.g. changing the cross-sectional area, not otherwise provided for
    • G02B27/0938Using specific optical elements
    • G02B27/0994Fibers, light pipes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02042Multicore optical fibres
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02057Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating comprising gratings
    • G02B6/02076Refractive index modulation gratings, e.g. Bragg gratings
    • G02B6/0208Refractive index modulation gratings, e.g. Bragg gratings characterised by their structure, wavelength response
    • G02B6/021Refractive index modulation gratings, e.g. Bragg gratings characterised by their structure, wavelength response characterised by the core or cladding or coating, e.g. materials, radial refractive index profiles, cladding shape
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02295Microstructured optical fibre
    • G02B6/023Microstructured optical fibre having different index layers arranged around the core for guiding light by reflection, i.e. 1D crystal, e.g. omniguide
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02295Microstructured optical fibre
    • G02B6/02314Plurality of longitudinal structures extending along optical fibre axis, e.g. holes
    • G02B6/02342Plurality of longitudinal structures extending along optical fibre axis, e.g. holes characterised by cladding features, i.e. light confining region
    • G02B6/02347Longitudinal structures arranged to form a regular periodic lattice, e.g. triangular, square, honeycomb unit cell repeated throughout cladding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02295Microstructured optical fibre
    • G02B6/02314Plurality of longitudinal structures extending along optical fibre axis, e.g. holes
    • G02B6/02342Plurality of longitudinal structures extending along optical fibre axis, e.g. holes characterised by cladding features, i.e. light confining region
    • G02B6/02371Cross section of longitudinal structures is non-circular
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02395Glass optical fibre with a protective coating, e.g. two layer polymer coating deposited directly on a silica cladding surface during fibre manufacture
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03605Highest refractive index not on central axis
    • G02B6/03611Highest index adjacent to central axis region, e.g. annular core, coaxial ring, centreline depression affecting waveguiding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03694Multiple layers differing in properties other than the refractive index, e.g. attenuation, diffusion, stress properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/14Mode converters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/255Splicing of light guides, e.g. by fusion or bonding
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/262Optical details of coupling light into, or out of, or between fibre ends, e.g. special fibre end shapes or associated optical elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/42Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements
    • G02B6/4201Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details
    • G02B6/4202Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details for coupling an active element with fibres without intermediate optical elements, e.g. fibres with plane ends, fibres with shaped ends, bundles
    • G02B6/4203Optical features
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/42Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements
    • G02B6/4201Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details
    • G02B6/4204Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details the coupling comprising intermediate optical elements, e.g. lenses, holograms
    • G02B6/4206Optical features
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/011Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  in optical waveguides, not otherwise provided for in this subclass
    • G02F1/0115Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  in optical waveguides, not otherwise provided for in this subclass in optical fibres
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01SDEVICES USING THE PROCESS OF LIGHT AMPLIFICATION BY STIMULATED EMISSION OF RADIATION [LASER] TO AMPLIFY OR GENERATE LIGHT; DEVICES USING STIMULATED EMISSION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION IN WAVE RANGES OTHER THAN OPTICAL
    • H01S3/00Lasers, i.e. devices using stimulated emission of electromagnetic radiation in the infrared, visible or ultraviolet wave range
    • H01S3/05Construction or shape of optical resonators; Accommodation of active medium therein; Shape of active medium
    • H01S3/06Construction or shape of active medium
    • H01S3/063Waveguide lasers, i.e. whereby the dimensions of the waveguide are of the order of the light wavelength
    • H01S3/067Fibre lasers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01SDEVICES USING THE PROCESS OF LIGHT AMPLIFICATION BY STIMULATED EMISSION OF RADIATION [LASER] TO AMPLIFY OR GENERATE LIGHT; DEVICES USING STIMULATED EMISSION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION IN WAVE RANGES OTHER THAN OPTICAL
    • H01S5/00Semiconductor lasers
    • H01S5/005Optical components external to the laser cavity, specially adapted therefor, e.g. for homogenisation or merging of the beams or for manipulating laser pulses, e.g. pulse shaping
    • H01S5/0085Optical components external to the laser cavity, specially adapted therefor, e.g. for homogenisation or merging of the beams or for manipulating laser pulses, e.g. pulse shaping for modulating the output, i.e. the laser beam is modulated outside the laser cavity
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F12/00Apparatus or devices specially adapted for additive manufacturing; Auxiliary means for additive manufacturing; Combinations of additive manufacturing apparatus or devices with other processing apparatus or devices
    • B22F12/40Radiation means
    • B22F12/44Radiation means characterised by the configuration of the radiation means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B22CASTING; POWDER METALLURGY
    • B22FWORKING METALLIC POWDER; MANUFACTURE OF ARTICLES FROM METALLIC POWDER; MAKING METALLIC POWDER; APPARATUS OR DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR METALLIC POWDER
    • B22F12/00Apparatus or devices specially adapted for additive manufacturing; Auxiliary means for additive manufacturing; Combinations of additive manufacturing apparatus or devices with other processing apparatus or devices
    • B22F12/40Radiation means
    • B22F12/49Scanners
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/12Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
    • G02B2006/12083Constructional arrangements
    • G02B2006/12121Laser
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B26/00Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements
    • G02B26/08Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light
    • G02B26/10Scanning systems
    • G02B26/101Scanning systems with both horizontal and vertical deflecting means, e.g. raster or XY scanners
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/02004Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating characterised by the core effective area or mode field radius
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/028Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating with core or cladding having graded refractive index
    • G02B6/0281Graded index region forming part of the central core segment, e.g. alpha profile, triangular, trapezoidal core
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/028Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating with core or cladding having graded refractive index
    • G02B6/0288Multimode fibre, e.g. graded index core for compensating modal dispersion
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03616Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03616Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference
    • G02B6/03622Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 2 layers only
    • G02B6/03627Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 2 layers only arranged - +
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03616Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference
    • G02B6/03622Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 2 layers only
    • G02B6/03633Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 2 layers only arranged - -
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03616Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference
    • G02B6/03638Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 3 layers only
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03616Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference
    • G02B6/03638Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 3 layers only
    • G02B6/0365Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 3 layers only arranged - - +
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/02Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
    • G02B6/036Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating core or cladding comprising multiple layers
    • G02B6/03616Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference
    • G02B6/03688Optical fibres characterised both by the number of different refractive index layers around the central core segment, i.e. around the innermost high index core layer, and their relative refractive index difference having 5 or more layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/42Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements
    • G02B6/4296Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements coupling with sources of high radiant energy, e.g. high power lasers, high temperature light sources
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/015Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on semiconductor elements with at least one potential jump barrier, e.g. PN, PIN junction
    • G02F1/0151Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on semiconductor elements with at least one potential jump barrier, e.g. PN, PIN junction modulating the refractive index
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P10/00Technologies related to metal processing
    • Y02P10/25Process efficiency

Definitions

  • the subject matter disclosed herein generally relates to methods of and systems for processing optical beams, such as laser beams associated with fiber-coupled lasers (e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, yttrium aluminum garnet (“YAG”) lasers).
  • optical beams such as laser beams associated with fiber-coupled lasers (e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, yttrium aluminum garnet (“YAG”) lasers).
  • YAG yttrium aluminum garnet
  • the subject matter disclosed herein also relates to methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics, such as beam diameter, spot size, divergence profile, spatial profile, beam shape, or the like, or any combination thereof, at an output, for example, of fiber-coupled lasers.
  • lasers include, for example, fiber lasers, disk lasers, diode lasers, diode-pumped solid state lasers, and lamp-pumped solid state lasers.
  • optical power is delivered from the laser to a work piece via an optical fiber.
  • Various fiber-coupled laser materials processing tasks require different beam characteristics (e.g., spatial profiles and/or divergence profiles). For example, cutting thick metal and welding generally require a larger beam diameter or spot size than cutting thin metal.
  • the laser beam properties would be adjustable to enable optimized processing for these different tasks.
  • users have two choices: (1) employ a laser system with fixed beam characteristics that can be used for different tasks but is not optimal for most of them (i.e., a compromise between performance and flexibility); or (2) purchase a laser system or accessories that offer variable beam characteristics but that add significant cost, size, weight, complexity, and perhaps performance degradation (e.g., optical loss or reduced speed due to delays involved while varying beam characteristics) or reliability degradation (e.g., reduced robustness or up-time).
  • performance degradation e.g., optical loss or reduced speed due to delays involved while varying beam characteristics
  • reliability degradation e.g., reduced robustness or up-time.
  • AM additive manufacturing
  • build rate refers to the time required to fuse a unit volume of, for example, powder or wire.
  • higher build rates can produce (1) coarser resolution of final products, (2) higher heat input requirements, (3) higher residual stresses in final products, (4) undesirable microstructures in final products, and/or (5) reductions in mechanical properties of final products.
  • This trade-off in build rate and part quality helps to define the value of an AM tool.
  • different parameters are used for areas of the build where different build rates are required (for example contouring versus bulk filling, or dissimilar cladding versus similar deposition).
  • the parameters that are adjusted are usually focus position, laser power, and/or speed.
  • a layer of powder may overlay what could be an existing fused structure or unfused powder, and control over the laser parameters as the laser beam moves across these structures would provide a better final part (less distortion, less porosity, better dimensional accuracy).
  • This control also pertains to the finished part roughness, as that is tied to the resolution used to create the edge of each layer.
  • standard commercial AM systems do not have the capability to pre-heat a powder bed or a substrate above 400° C.
  • This pre-heating is generally accomplished from the exterior of the build envelope (e.g., using a heated platform or chamber). Thermal energy typically is generated electrically (resistive or inductive).
  • the unfused powder is very insulative.
  • the shape and density of the structure being built can vary from build-to-build. The complications associated with these factors make it difficult to provide a uniform and repeatable temperature in the build volume with such traditional heating methods.
  • a laser source and associated beam delivery system usually are developed for a single process: welding, cutting, cladding, drilling, marking, etc.
  • an expensive laser AM tool may be capable of being used in only one process.
  • the versatility and value of such an AM tool may be severely limited by this single-process capability.
  • At least disclosed herein are methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics.
  • a method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam can comprise: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first refractive-index profile (“RIP”); coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and one or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber.
  • the first RIP can differ from the second RIP.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a BPP of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam quality factor (M 2 factor) of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • M 2 factor beam quality factor
  • the method can further comprise: modulating the output beam while ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the modulating of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • the output beam can be generated as a series of pulses, one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modified in a series of pulses, or the output beam can be generated as a series of pulses and one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modified in a series of pulses.
  • the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency, one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency, or the output beam and one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency.
  • the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle, one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle, or the output beam and one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle.
  • the method can further comprise: using the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the using of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • the method can further comprise: increasing power density of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, marking, patterning, roughening, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the increasing of the power density can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • the method can further comprise: decreasing power density of the output beam for cladding, cutting, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, smoothing, surface texturing, and/or trepanning one or more parts of a product.
  • the decreasing of the power density can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • the method can further comprise: increasing beam diameter of the output beam for heat-treating and/or smoothing one or more parts of a product.
  • the increasing of the beam diameter can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to fuse the powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to fuse powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, using the output beam to fuse the powder, and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to fuse powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • a method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam can comprise: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first RIP; coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and two or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the two or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber.
  • the first RIP can be the same as the second RIP.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an example fiber structure for providing a laser beam having variable beam characteristics
  • FIG. 2 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example fiber structure for delivering a beam with variable beam characteristics
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example method of perturbing a fiber structure for providing a beam having variable beam characteristics
  • FIG. 4 is a graph illustrating the calculated spatial profile of the lowest-order mode (LP 01 ) for a first length of a fiber for different fiber bend radii;
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a two-dimensional intensity distribution at a junction when a fiber for varying beam characteristics is nearly straight
  • FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a two-dimensional intensity distribution at a junction when a fiber for varying beam characteristics is bent with a radius chosen to preferentially excite a particular confinement region of a second length of fiber;
  • FIGS. 7-10 depict experimental results to illustrate further output beams for various bend radii of a fiber for varying beam characteristics shown in FIG. 2 ;
  • FIGS. 11-16 illustrate cross-sectional views of example first lengths of fiber for enabling adjustment of beam characteristics in a fiber assembly
  • FIGS. 17-19 illustrate cross-sectional views of example second lengths of fiber (“confinement fibers”) for confining adjusted beam characteristics in a fiber assembly;
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate cross-sectional views of example second lengths of fiber for changing a divergence angle of and confining an adjusted beam in a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics
  • FIG. 22A illustrates an example laser system including a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics disposed between a feeding fiber and process head;
  • FIG. 22B illustrates an example laser system including a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics disposed between a feeding fiber and process head;
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example laser system including a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics disposed between a feeding fiber and multiple process fibers;
  • FIG. 24 illustrates examples of various perturbation assemblies for providing variable beam characteristics according to various examples provided herein;
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example process for adjusting and maintaining modified characteristics of an optical beam
  • FIGS. 26-28 are cross-sectional views illustrating example second lengths of fiber (“confinement fibers”) for confining adjusted beam characteristics in a fiber assembly;
  • FIG. 29 depicts a first example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam
  • FIG. 30 depicts a second example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam
  • FIG. 31 depicts a plan view of a build layer having first and second regions
  • FIG. 32 depicts an elevation view of a 3D object manufactured using a powder bed process
  • FIG. 33 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a first point during the powder bed process
  • FIG. 34 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a second point during the powder bed process
  • FIG. 35 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a third point during the powder bed process
  • FIG. 36 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a fourth point during the powder bed process
  • FIG. 37 depicts a plan view of a portion of a 3D object after fusing
  • FIG. 38A depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing
  • FIG. 38B depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing and further processing.
  • first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various elements, components, regions, layers, and/or sections, these elements, components, regions, layers, and/or sections should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element, component, region, layer, and/or section from another element, component, region, layer, and/or section. For example, a first element, component, region, layer, or section could be termed a second element, component, region, layer, or section without departing from the teachings of examples.
  • the present disclosure is directed to methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics.
  • beam characteristics refers to one or more of the following terms used to describe an optical beam. In general, the beam characteristics of most interest depend on the specifics of the application or optical system.
  • beam diameter is defined as the distance across the center of the beam along an axis for which the irradiance (intensity) equals 1/e 2 of the maximum irradiance (as understood by a person having ordinary skill in the art (“PHOSITA”)), other measures of beam diameter include, for example, full width at half maximum (“FWHM”) and second moment width/distance between 4 ⁇ values (“D4 ⁇ ”)). While examples disclosed herein generally use beams that propagate in azimuthally symmetric modes, elliptical or other beam shapes can be used, and beam diameter can be different along different axes. Circular beams are characterized by a single beam diameter. Other beam shapes can have different beam diameters along different axes.
  • spot size is the radial distance (radius) from the center point of maximum irradiance to the 1/e 2 point (or equivalent for other measures of beam diameter—see definition of “beam diameter” above).
  • beam divergence distribution is the distribution of enclosed power within a given propagation angle (e.g., full power vs. full cone angle). This quantity is sometimes called the “angular distribution” or “NA distribution.”
  • BPP beam parameter product of a laser beam
  • the units of BPP are typically millimeters-milliradians (“mm-mrad”).
  • a “confinement fiber” is defined to be a fiber that possesses one or more confinement regions, wherein a confinement region comprises a higher-index region (core region) surrounded by a lower-index region (cladding region).
  • the RIP of a confinement fiber may include one or more higher-index regions (core regions) surrounded by lower-index regions (cladding regions), wherein light is guided in the higher-index regions.
  • Each confinement region and each cladding region can have any RIP, including but not limited to step-index and graded-index.
  • the confinement regions may or may not be concentric and may be a variety of shapes such as circular, annular, polygonal, arcuate, elliptical, irregular, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • confinement regions in a particular confinement fiber may all have the same shape or may be different shapes. Moreover, confinement regions may be co-axial or may have offset axes with respect to one another. Confinement regions may be of uniform thickness about a central axis in the longitudinal direction, or the thicknesses may vary about the central axis in the longitudinal direction.
  • intensity distribution refers to optical intensity as a function of position along a line (one-dimensional (“1D”) profile) or on a plane (two-dimensional (“2D”) profile).
  • the line or plane is usually taken perpendicular to the propagation direction of the light. It is a quantitative property.
  • Luminance is a photometric measure of the luminous intensity per unit area of light travelling in a given direction.
  • M 2 is equal to the BPP divided by ⁇ / ⁇ , where ⁇ is the wavelength of the beam in microns (if BPP is expressed in units of mm-mrad).
  • NA numerical aperture
  • optical intensity is not an official (SI) unit, but is used to denote incident power per unit area on a surface or passing through a plane.
  • power density refers to optical power per unit area, although this is also referred to as “optical intensity.”
  • radial beam position refers to the position of a beam in a fiber measured with respect to the center of the fiber core in a direction perpendicular to the fiber axis.
  • Radiance is the radiation emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction by a unit area of an optical source (e.g., a laser). Radiance may be altered by changing the beam intensity distribution and/or beam divergence profile or distribution. The ability to vary the radiance profile of a laser beam implies the ability to vary the BPP.
  • RIP refers to the refractive index as a function of position along a line (1D) or in a plane (2D) perpendicular to the fiber axis. Many fibers are azimuthally symmetric, in which case the 1D RIP is identical for any azimuthal angle.
  • a “step-index fiber” has a RIP that is flat (refractive index independent of position) within the fiber core.
  • a “graded-index fiber” has a RIP in which the refractive index decreases with increasing radial position (i.e., with increasing distance from the center of the fiber core).
  • a “parabolic-index fiber” is a specific case of a graded-index fiber in which the refractive index decreases quadratically with increasing distance from the center of the fiber core.
  • additive manufacturing refers to processes of joining materials to make parts from three-dimensional (“3D”) model data, usually layer upon layer, as opposed to subtractive manufacturing and formative manufacturing methodologies.
  • Powder bed fusion for example, is one common additive material process.
  • kerf width refers to the width of material that is removed during operations that remove material (e.g., cutting).
  • build rate refers to the time required to fuse a unit volume of, for example, powder or wire.
  • fuse and “fusing” refer to sintering, melting (e.g., partially or fully melting), chemical bonding, or any other phenomena in which particles are joined together using heat (e.g., coalescing of two or more materials due to application of heat).
  • VBC variable beam characteristics
  • This VBC fiber is configured to vary a wide variety of optical beam characteristics.
  • beam characteristics can be controlled using the VBC fiber thus allowing users to tune various beam characteristics to suit the particular requirements of an extensive variety of laser processing applications.
  • a VBC fiber may be used to tune: beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, intensity distribution, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity, power density, radial beam position, radiance, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • the disclosed technology entails coupling a laser beam into a fiber in which the characteristics of the laser beam in the fiber can be adjusted by perturbing the laser beam and/or perturbing a first length of fiber by any of a variety of methods (e.g., bending the fiber or introducing one or more other perturbations) and fully or partially maintaining adjusted beam characteristics in a second length of fiber.
  • the second length of fiber is specially configured to maintain and/or further modify the adjusted beam characteristics.
  • the second length of fiber preserves the adjusted beam characteristics through delivery of the laser beam to its ultimate use (e.g., materials processing).
  • the first and second lengths of fiber may comprise the same or different fibers.
  • Fiber-coupled lasers typically deliver an output via a delivery fiber having a step-index refractive index profile (“RIP”), i.e., a flat or constant refractive index within the fiber core.
  • RIP refractive index profile
  • the RIP of the delivery fiber may not be perfectly flat, depending on the design of the fiber.
  • Important parameters are the fiber core diameter (“d core ”) and NA.
  • the core diameter is typically in the range of 10-1000 microns (although other values are possible), and the NA is typically in the range of 0.06-0.22 (although other values are possible).
  • a delivery fiber from the laser may be routed directly to the process head or work piece, or it may be routed to a fiber-to-fiber coupler (“FFC”) or fiber-to-fiber switch (“FFS”), which couples the light from the delivery fiber into a process fiber that transmits the beam to the process head or the work piece.
  • FFC fiber-to-fiber coupler
  • FFS fiber-to-fiber switch
  • MM fiber multimode
  • SM fiber single-mode
  • the beam characteristics from a SM fiber are uniquely determined by the fiber parameters.
  • the beam characteristics from a MM fiber can vary (unit-to-unit and/or as a function of laser power and time), depending on the beam characteristics from the laser source(s) coupled into the fiber, the launching or splicing conditions into the fiber, the fiber RIP, and the static and dynamic geometry of the fiber (bending, coiling, motion, micro-bending, etc.).
  • the beam characteristics may not be optimum for a given materials processing task, and it is unlikely to be optimum for a range of tasks, motivating the desire to be able to systematically vary the beam characteristics in order to customize or optimize them for a particular processing task.
  • the VBC fiber may have a first length and a second length and may be configured to be interposed as an in-fiber device between the delivery fiber and the process head to provide the desired adjustability of the beam characteristics.
  • a perturbation device and/or assembly is disposed in close proximity to and/or coupled with the VBC fiber and is responsible for perturbing the beam in a first length such that the beam's characteristics are altered in the first length of fiber, and the altered characteristics are preserved or further altered as the beam propagates in the second length of fiber.
  • the perturbed beam is launched into a second length of the VBC fiber configured to conserve adjusted beam characteristics.
  • the first and second lengths of fiber may be the same or different fibers and/or the second length of fiber may comprise a confinement fiber.
  • the beam characteristics that are conserved by the second length of VBC fiber may include any of: angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an example VBC fiber 100 for providing a laser beam having variable beam characteristics without requiring the use of free-space optics to change the beam characteristics.
  • VBC fiber 100 comprises a first length of fiber 104 and a second length of fiber 108 .
  • First length of fiber 104 and second length of fiber 108 may be the same or different fibers and may have the same or different RIPs.
  • the first length of fiber 104 and the second length of fiber 108 may be joined together by a splice.
  • First length of fiber 104 and second length of fiber 108 may be coupled in other ways, may be spaced apart, or may be connected via an interposing component such as another length of fiber, free-space optics, glue, index-matching material, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • a perturbation device 110 is disposed proximal to and/or envelops perturbation region 106 .
  • Perturbation device 110 may be a device, assembly, in-fiber structure, and/or other feature.
  • Perturbation device 110 at least perturbs optical beam 102 in first length of fiber 104 or second length of fiber 108 or a combination thereof in order to adjust one or more beam characteristics of optical beam 102 .
  • Adjustment of optical beam 102 responsive to perturbation by perturbation device 110 may occur in first length of fiber 104 or second length of fiber 108 or a combination thereof.
  • Perturbation region 106 may extend over various widths and may or may not extend into a portion of second length of fiber 108 .
  • perturbation device 110 may physically act on VBC fiber 100 to perturb the fiber and adjust the characteristics of optical beam 102 .
  • perturbation device 110 may act directly on optical beam 102 to alter its beam characteristics. Subsequent to being adjusted, perturbed beam 112 has different beam characteristics than optical beam 102 , which will be fully or partially conserved in second length of fiber 108 .
  • perturbation device 110 need not be disposed near a splice.
  • VBC fiber 100 may be a single fiber, first length of fiber and second length of fiber could be spaced apart, or secured with a small gap (air-spaced or filled with an optical material, such as optical cement or an index-matching material).
  • Perturbed beam 112 is launched into second length of fiber 108 , where perturbed beam 112 characteristics are largely maintained or continue to evolve as perturbed beam 112 propagates yielding the adjusted beam characteristics at the output of second length of fiber 108 .
  • the new beam characteristics may include an adjusted intensity distribution.
  • an altered beam intensity distribution will be conserved in various structurally bounded confinement regions of second length of fiber 108 .
  • the beam intensity distribution may be tuned to a desired beam intensity distribution optimized for a particular laser processing task.
  • the intensity distribution of perturbed beam 112 will evolve as it propagates in the second length of fiber 108 to fill the confinement region(s) into which perturbed beam 112 is launched responsive to conditions in first length of fiber 104 and perturbation caused by perturbation device 110 .
  • the angular distribution may evolve as the beam propagates in the second fiber, depending on launch conditions and fiber characteristics.
  • fibers largely preserve the input divergence distribution, but the distribution can be broadened if the input divergence distribution is narrow and/or if the fiber has irregularities or deliberate features that perturb the divergence distribution.
  • the various confinement regions, perturbations, and fiber features of second length of fiber 108 are described in greater detail below.
  • Optical beam 102 and perturbed beam 112 are conceptual abstractions intended to illustrate how a beam may propagate through a VBC fiber 100 for providing variable beam characteristics and are not intended to closely model the behavior of a particular optical beam.
  • VBC fiber 100 may be manufactured by a variety of methods including Plasma Chemical Vapor Deposition (“PCVD”), Outside Vapor Deposition (“OVD”), Vapor Axial Deposition (“VAD”), Metal-Organic Chemical Vapor Deposition (“MOCVD”), and/or Direct Nanoparticle Deposition (“DND”).
  • VBC fiber 100 may comprise a variety of materials.
  • VBC fiber 100 may comprise SiO 2 , SiO 2 doped with GeO 2 , germanosilicate, phosphorus pentoxide, phosphosilicate, Al 2 O 3 , aluminosilicate, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • Confinement regions may be bounded by cladding doped with fluorine, boron, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • Other dopants may be added to active fibers, including rare-earth ions such as Er 3+ (erbium), Yb 3+ (ytterbium), Nd 3+ (neodymium), Tm 3+ (thulium), Ho 3+ (holmium), or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • Confinement regions may be bounded by cladding having a lower index than the confinement region with fluorine or boron doping.
  • VBC fiber 100 may comprise photonic crystal fibers or micro-structured fibers.
  • VBC fiber 100 is suitable for use in any of a variety of fiber, fiber optic, or fiber laser devices, including continuous wave and pulsed fiber lasers, disk lasers, solid state lasers, or diode lasers (pulse rate unlimited except by physical constraints). Furthermore, implementations in a planar waveguide or other types of waveguides and not just fibers are within the scope of the claimed technology.
  • FIG. 2 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example VBC fiber 200 for adjusting beam characteristics of an optical beam.
  • VBC fiber 200 may be a process fiber because it may deliver the beam to a process head for material processing.
  • VBC fiber 200 comprises a first length of fiber 204 spliced at splice junction 206 to a second length of fiber 208 .
  • a perturbation assembly 210 is disposed proximal to splice junction 206 .
  • Perturbation assembly 210 may be any of a variety of devices configured to enable adjustment of the beam characteristics of an optical beam 202 propagating in VBC fiber 200 .
  • perturbation assembly 210 may be a mandrel and/or another device that may provide means of varying the bend radius and/or bend length of VBC fiber 200 near the splice. Other examples of perturbation devices are discussed below with respect to FIG. 24 .
  • first length of fiber 204 has a parabolic-index first RIP 212 as indicated by the left RIP graph. Most of the intensity distribution of optical beam 202 is concentrated in the center of first length of fiber 204 when first length of fiber 204 is straight or nearly straight.
  • Second length of fiber 208 is a confinement fiber having a second RIP 214 as shown in the right RIP graph. Second length of fiber 208 includes confinement regions 216 , 218 , and 220 .
  • Confinement region 216 is a central core surrounded by two annular (or ring-shaped) confinement regions 218 and 220 .
  • Layers 222 and 224 are structural barriers of lower index material between confinement regions 216 , 218 and/or 220 , commonly referred to as “cladding” regions.
  • layers 222 and 224 may comprise rings of fluorosilicate; in some embodiments, the fluorosilicate cladding layers are relatively thin.
  • Other materials may be used as well and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • perturbation assembly 210 may physically act on second length of fiber 208 and/or optical beam 202 to adjust its beam characteristics and generate adjusted beam 226 .
  • the intensity distribution of optical beam 202 is modified by perturbation assembly 210 .
  • the intensity distribution of adjusted beam 226 may be concentrated in outer confinement regions 218 and 220 with relatively little intensity in the central core confinement region 216 . Because each of confinement regions 216 , 218 , and/or 220 is isolated by the thin layers of lower index material in barrier layers 222 and 224 , second length of fiber 208 can substantially maintain the adjusted intensity distribution of adjusted beam 226 .
  • the beam will typically become distributed azimuthally within a given confinement region but will not transition (significantly) between the confinement regions as it propagates along the second length of fiber 208 .
  • the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 226 are largely conserved within the isolated confinement regions 216 , 218 , and/or 220 .
  • central core confinement region 216 and annular confinement regions 218 and 220 may be composed of fused silica glass, and cladding 222 and 224 defining the confinement regions may be composed of fluorosilicate glass.
  • Other materials may be used to form the various confinement regions 216 , 218 , and/or 220 , including germanosilicate, phosphosilicate, aluminosilicate, or the like, or a combination thereof, and claimed subject matter is not so limited.
  • Other materials may be used to form the barrier rings 222 and/or 224 , including fused silica, borosilicate, or the like, or a combination thereof, and claimed subject matter is not so limited.
  • the optical fibers or waveguides include or are composed of various polymers, plastics, or crystalline materials.
  • the core confinement regions have refractive indices that are greater than the refractive indices of adjacent barrier/cladding regions.
  • confinement regions may be configured to provide stepwise beam displacement.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example method of perturbing VBC fiber 200 for providing variable beam characteristics of an optical beam.
  • Changing the bend radius of a fiber may change the radial beam position, divergence angle, and/or radiance profile of a beam within the fiber.
  • the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 can be decreased from a first bend radius RI to a second bend radius R 2 about splice junction 206 by using a stepped mandrel or cone as the perturbation assembly 210 . Additionally or alternatively, the engagement length on the mandrel(s) or cone can be varied. Rollers 250 may be employed to engage VBC fiber 200 across perturbation assembly 210 .
  • an amount of engagement of rollers 250 with VBC fiber 200 has been shown to shift the distribution of the intensity profile to the outer confinement regions 218 and 220 of VBC fiber 200 with a fixed mandrel radius.
  • the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 can also vary beam characteristics in a controlled and reproducible way.
  • changing the bend radius and/or length over which the fiber is bent at a particular bend radius also modifies the intensity distribution of the beam such that one or more modes may be shifted radially away from the center of a fiber core.
  • the adjusted beam characteristics such as radial beam position and radiance profile of optical beam 202 will not return to optical beam 202 's unperturbed state before being launched into second length of fiber 208 .
  • the adjusted radial beam characteristics, including position, divergence angle, and/or intensity distribution, of adjusted beam 226 can be varied based on an extent of decrease in the bend radius and/or the extent of the bend length of VBC fiber 200 . Thus, specific beam characteristics may be obtained using this method.
  • first length of fiber 204 having first RIP 212 is spliced at splice junction 206 to a second length of fiber 208 having the second RIP 214 .
  • Such a RIP may be similar to the RIPs shown in fibers illustrated in FIGS. 17, 18 , and/or 19 .
  • FIGS. 7-10 provide experimental results for VBC fiber 200 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 ) and illustrate further a beam response to perturbation of VBC fiber 200 when a perturbation assembly 210 acts on VBC fiber 200 to bend the fiber.
  • FIGS. 4-6 are simulations and FIGS. 7-10 are experimental results wherein a beam from a SM 1050 nanometer (“nm”) source was launched into an input fiber (not shown) with a 40 micron (“ ⁇ m”) core diameter. The input fiber was spliced to first length of fiber 204 .
  • nm nanometer
  • ⁇ m 40 micron
  • FIG. 4 is an example graph 400 illustrating the calculated profile of the lowest-order mode (LP 01 ) for a first length of fiber 204 for different fiber bend radii 402 , wherein a perturbation assembly 210 involves bending VBC fiber 200 .
  • a perturbation assembly 210 involves bending VBC fiber 200 .
  • Higher-order modes (LR In ) also shift with bending.
  • curve 406 for LP 01 is centered at or near the center of VBC fiber 200 .
  • curve 408 for LP 01 is shifted to a radial position of about 40 ⁇ m from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200 .
  • curve 410 for LP 01 is shifted to a radial position about 50 ⁇ m from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200 .
  • curve 412 for LP 01 is shifted to a radial position about 60 ⁇ m from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200 .
  • curve 414 for LP 01 is shifted to a radial position about 80 ⁇ m from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200 .
  • a curve 416 for LP 01 is shifted to a radial position about 85 ⁇ m from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200 .
  • the shape of the mode remains relatively constant (until it approaches the edge of the core), which is a specific property of a parabolic RIP. Although, this property may be desirable in some situations, it is not required for the VBC functionality, and other RIPs may be employed.
  • second length of fiber 208 is to “trap” or confine the adjusted intensity distribution of the beam in a confinement region that is displaced from the center of the VBC fiber 200 .
  • the splice between first length of fiber 204 and second length of fiber 208 is included in the bent region, thus the shifted mode profile will be preferentially launched into one of the ring-shaped confinement regions 218 and 220 or be distributed among the confinement regions.
  • FIGS. 5 and 6 illustrate this effect.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an example two-dimensional intensity distribution at splice junction 206 within second length of fiber 208 when VBC fiber 200 is nearly straight.
  • a significant portion of LP 01 and LP In are within confinement region 216 of second length of fiber 208 .
  • FIG. 6 illustrates the two-dimensional intensity distribution at splice junction 206 within second length of fiber 208 when VBC fiber 200 is bent with a radius chosen to preferentially excite confinement region 220 (the outermost confinement region) of second length of fiber 208 .
  • a significant portion of LP 01 and LP In are within confinement region 220 of second length of fiber 208 .
  • second length of fiber 208 confinement region 216 has a 100 micron diameter
  • confinement region 218 is between 120 micron and 200 micron in diameter
  • confinement region 220 is between 220 micron and 300 micron diameter.
  • Confinement regions 216 , 218 , and 220 are separated by 10 um thick rings of fluorosilicate, providing an NA of 0.22 for the confinement regions.
  • Other inner and outer diameters for the confinement regions, thicknesses of the rings separating the confinement regions, NA values for the confinement regions, and numbers of confinement regions may be employed.
  • VBC fiber 200 when VBC fiber 200 is straight about 90% of the power is contained within the central confinement region 216 , and about 100% of the power is contained within confinement regions 216 and 218 .
  • FIG. 6 when VBC fiber 200 is bent to preferentially excite second ring confinement region 220 , nearly 75% of the power is contained within confinement region 220 , and more than 95% of the power is contained within confinement regions 218 and 220 .
  • These calculations include LP 01 , and two higher-order modes, which is typical in some 2-4 kW fiber lasers.
  • the bend radius determines the spatial overlap of the modal intensity distribution of the first length of fiber 204 with the different guiding confinement regions 216 , 218 , and/or 220 of the second length of fiber 208 .
  • Changing the bend radius can thus change the intensity distribution at the output of the second length of fiber 208 , thereby changing the beam diameter or spot size of the beam, and thus also changing its radiance and BPP value.
  • This adjustment of the beam diameter or spot size may be accomplished in an all-fiber structure, involving no free-space optics and consequently may reduce or eliminate the disadvantages of free-space optics discussed above.
  • Such adjustments can also be made with other perturbation assemblies that alter bend radius, bend length, fiber tension, temperature, or other perturbations discussed below.
  • the output of the process fiber is imaged at or near the work piece by the process head. Varying the intensity distribution as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 thus enables variation of the beam profile at the work piece in order to tune and/or optimize the process, as desired.
  • Specific RIPs for the two fibers were assumed for the purpose of the above calculations, but other RIPs are possible, and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • FIGS. 7-10 depict experimental results (measured intensity distributions) to illustrate further output beams for various bend radii of VBC fiber 200 shown in FIG. 2 .
  • FIG. 7 when VBC fiber 200 is straight, the beam is nearly completely confined to confinement region 216 .
  • the intensity distribution shifts to higher diameters ( FIGS. 8-10 ).
  • FIG. 8 depicts the intensity distribution when the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 is chosen to shift the intensity distribution preferentially to confinement region 218 .
  • FIG. 9 depicts the experimental results when the bend radius is further reduced and chosen to shift the intensity distribution outward to confinement region 220 and confinement region 218 .
  • the beam is nearly a “donut mode,” with most of the intensity in the outermost confinement region 220 .
  • the intensity distributions are nearly symmetric azimuthally because of scrambling within confinement regions as the beam propagates within the VBC fiber 200 .
  • the beam will typically scramble azimuthally as it propagates, various structures or perturbations (e.g., coils) could be included to facilitate this process.
  • FIGS. 7-10 pertain to the particular fibers used in this experiment, and the details will vary depending on the specifics of the implementation.
  • the spatial profile and divergence distribution of the output beam and their dependence on bend radius will depend on the specific RIPs employed, on the splice parameters, and on the characteristics of the laser source launched into the first fiber.
  • Example RIPs for the first length of fiber include other graded-index profiles, step-index, pedestal designs (i.e., nested cores with progressively lower refractive indices with increasing distance from the center of the fiber), and designs with nested cores with the same refractive index value but with various NA values for the central core and the surrounding rings.
  • Example RIPs for the second length of fiber in addition to the profile shown in FIG.
  • VBC fiber 200 and other examples of a VBC fiber described herein are not restricted to use of two fibers. In some examples, implementation may include use of one fiber or more than two fibers.
  • the fiber(s) may not be axially uniform; for example, they could include fiber Bragg gratings or long-period gratings, or the diameter could vary along the length of the fiber.
  • the fibers do not have to be azimuthally symmetric (e.g., the core(s) could have square or polygonal shapes).
  • Various fiber coatings may be employed, including high-index or index-matched coatings (which strip light at the glass-polymer interface) and low-index coatings (which guide light by total internal reflection at the glass-polymer interface).
  • multiple fiber coatings may be used on VBC fiber 200 .
  • FIGS. 11-16 illustrate cross-sectional views of examples of first lengths of fiber for enabling adjustment of beam characteristics in a VBC fiber responsive to perturbation of an optical beam propagating in the first lengths of fiber.
  • Some examples of beam characteristics that may be adjusted in the first length of fiber are: angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • first lengths of fiber that may be utilized to enable adjustment of beam characteristics in a VBC fiber assembly. Selection of materials, appropriate RIPs, and other variables for the first lengths of fiber illustrated in FIGS. 11-16 at least depend on a desired beam output. A wide variety of fiber variables are contemplated and are within the scope of the claimed subject matter. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited by examples provided herein.
  • first length of fiber 1100 comprises a step-index profile 1102 .
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a first length of fiber 1200 comprising a “pedestal RIP” (i.e., a core comprising a step-index region surrounded by a larger step-index region) 1202 .
  • FIG. 13 illustrates first length of fiber 1300 comprising a multiple-pedestal RIP 1302 .
  • FIG. 14A illustrates first length of fiber 1400 comprising a graded-index profile 1418 surrounded by a down-doped region 1404 .
  • modes may shift radially outward in first length of fiber 1400 (e.g., during bending of first length of fiber 1400 ).
  • Graded-index profile 1402 may be designed to promote maintenance or even compression of modal shape. This design may promote adjustment of a beam propagating in first length of fiber 1400 to generate a beam having a beam intensity distribution concentrated in an outer perimeter of the fiber (i.e., in a portion of the fiber core that is displaced from the fiber axis).
  • the intensity distribution of the adjusted beam may be trapped in the outermost confinement region, providing a donut shaped intensity distribution.
  • a beam spot having a narrow outer confinement region may be useful to enable certain material processing actions.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates first length of fiber 1406 comprising a graded-index profile 1414 surrounded by a down-doped region 1408 similar to first length of fiber 1400 .
  • first length of fiber 1406 includes a divergence structure 1410 (a lower-index region) as can be seen in profile 1412 .
  • the divergence structure 1410 is an area of material with a lower refractive index than that of the surrounding core. As the beam is launched into first length of fiber 1406 , refraction from divergence structure 1410 causes the beam divergence to increase in first length of fiber 1406 .
  • the amount of increased divergence depends on the amount of spatial overlap of the beam with the divergence structure 1410 and the magnitude of the index difference between the divergence structure 1410 and the core material.
  • Divergence structure 1410 can have a variety of shapes, depending on the input divergence distribution and desired output divergence distribution. In an example, divergence structure 1410 has a triangular or graded index shape.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a first length of fiber 1500 comprising a parabolic-index central region 1508 surrounded by a constant-index region 1502 , and the constant-index region 1502 is surrounded by a lower-index annular layer 1506 and another constant-index region 1504 .
  • the lower-index annular layer 1506 helps guide a beam propagating in first length of fiber 1500 .
  • modes shift radially outward in first length of fiber 1500 (e.g., during bending of first length of fiber 1500 ).
  • parabolic-index central region 1508 promotes retention of modal shape.
  • this fiber design works with a confinement fiber having a central step-index core and a single annular core.
  • the parabolic-index central region 1508 of the RIP overlaps with the central step-index core of the confinement fiber.
  • the constant-index region 1502 overlaps with the annular core of the confinement fiber.
  • the constant-index region 1502 of the first fiber is intended to make it easier to move the beam into overlap with the annular core by bending. This fiber design also works with other designs of the confinement fiber.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a first length of fiber 1600 , having RIP 1602 , comprising guiding regions 1604 , 1606 , 1608 , and 1616 bounded by lower-index layers 1610 , 1612 , and 1614 where the indexes of the lower-index layers 1610 , 1612 , and 1614 are stepped or, more generally, do not all have the same value.
  • the stepped-index layers may serve to bound the beam intensity to certain guiding regions 1604 , 1606 , 1608 , and/or 1616 when the perturbation assembly 210 (see FIG. 2 ) acts on the first length of fiber 1600 .
  • adjusted beam light may be trapped in the guiding regions over a range of perturbation actions (such as over a range of bend radii, a range of bend lengths, a range of micro-bending pressures, and/or a range of acousto-optical signals), allowing for a certain degree of perturbation tolerance before a beam intensity distribution is shifted to a more distant radial position in first length of fiber 1600 .
  • variation in beam characteristics may be controlled in a step-wise fashion.
  • the radial widths of the guiding regions 1604 , 1606 , 1608 , and 1616 may be adjusted to achieve a desired ring width, as may be required by an application.
  • a guiding region can have a thicker radial width to facilitate trapping of a larger fraction of the incoming beam profile if desired.
  • Guiding region 1606 is an example of such a design.
  • FIGS. 17-21 depict examples of fibers configured to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics in the second length of fiber (e.g., second length of fiber 208 ).
  • These fiber designs are referred to as “ring-shaped confinement fibers” because they contain a central core surrounded by annular or ring-shaped cores.
  • These designs are merely examples and not an exhaustive recitation of the variety of fiber RIPs that may be used to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics within a fiber.
  • claimed subject matter is not limited to the examples provided herein.
  • any of the first lengths of fiber described above with respect to FIGS. 11-16 may be combined with any of the second length of fiber described FIGS. 17-21 .
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber for maintaining and/or confining adjusted beam characteristics in a VBC fiber assembly.
  • the second length of fiber 1700 may maintain at least a portion of the beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber within one or more of confinement regions 1704 , 1706 , and/or 1708 .
  • Second length of fiber 1700 has a RIP 1702 .
  • Each of confinement regions 1704 , 1706 , and/or 1708 is bounded by a lower index layer 1710 and/or 1712 .
  • This design enables second length of fiber 1700 to maintain the adjusted beam characteristics.
  • a beam output by second length of fiber 1700 will substantially maintain the received adjusted beam as modified in the first length of fiber giving the output beam adjusted beam characteristics, which may be customized to a processing task or other application.
  • FIG. 18 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 1800 for maintaining and/or confining beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber in a VBC fiber assembly.
  • Second length of fiber 1800 has a RIP 1802 .
  • confinement regions 1808 , 1810 , and/or 1812 have different thicknesses than confinement regions 1704 , 1706 , and 1708 .
  • Each of confinement regions 1808 , 1810 , and/or 1812 is bounded by a lower index layer 1804 and/or 1806 . Varying the thicknesses of the confinement regions (and/or barrier regions) enables tailoring or optimization of a confined adjusted radiance profile by selecting particular radial positions within which to confine an adjusted beam.
  • FIG. 19 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 1900 having a RIP 1902 for maintaining and/or confining an adjusted beam in a VBC fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics.
  • the number and thicknesses of confinement regions 1904 , 1906 , 1908 , and 1910 are different from second lengths of fiber 1700 and 1800 and the barrier layers 1912 , 1914 , and 1916 are of varied thicknesses as well.
  • confinement regions 1904 , 1906 , 1908 , and 1910 have different indexes of refraction and barrier layers 1912 , 1914 , and 1916 have different indexes of refraction as well.
  • This design may further enable a more granular or optimized tailoring of the confinement and/or maintenance of an adjusted beam radiance to particular radial locations within second length of fiber 1900 .
  • the modified beam characteristics of the beam (having an adjusted intensity distribution, radial position, and/or divergence angle, or the like, or a combination thereof) is confined within a specific radius by one or more of confinement regions 1904 , 1906 , 1908 , and/or 1910 of second length of fiber 1900 .
  • the divergence angle of a beam may be conserved or adjusted and then conserved in the second length of fiber.
  • claimed subject matter is not limited to the examples provided herein.
  • FIG. 20 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 2000 having RIP 2002 for modifying, maintaining, and/or confining beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber.
  • second length of fiber 2000 is similar to the previously described second lengths of fiber and forms a portion of the VBC fiber assembly for delivering variable beam characteristics as discussed above.
  • Second length of fiber 2000 also has a divergence structure 2014 situated within the confinement region 2006 .
  • the divergence structure 2014 is an area of material with a lower refractive index than that of the surrounding confinement region.
  • divergence structure 2014 As the beam is launched into second length of fiber 2000 , refraction from divergence structure 2014 causes the beam divergence to increase in second length of fiber 2000 .
  • the amount of increased divergence depends on the amount of spatial overlap of the beam with the divergence structure 2014 and the magnitude of the index difference between the divergence structure 2014 and the core material.
  • the divergence distribution may be varied, The adjusted divergence of the beam is conserved in second length of fiber 2000 , which is configured to deliver the adjusted beam to the process head, another optical system (e.g., fiber-to-fiber coupler or fiber-to-fiber switch), the work piece, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • divergence structure 2014 may have an index dip of about 10 ⁇ 5 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 with respect to the surrounding material. Other values of the index dip may be employed within the scope of this disclosure and claimed subject matter is not so limited.
  • FIG. 21 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 2100 having a RIP 2102 for modifying, maintaining, and/or confining beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber.
  • Second length of fiber 2100 forms a portion of a VBC fiber assembly for delivering a beam having variable characteristics.
  • Second length of fiber 2100 also has a plurality of divergence structures 2114 and 2118 .
  • the divergence structures 2114 and 2118 are areas of graded lower index material.
  • divergence structure 2114 and 2118 causes the beam divergence to increase.
  • the amount of increased divergence depends on the amount of spatial overlap of the beam with the divergence structure and the magnitude of the index difference between the divergence structure 2114 and/or 2118 and the surrounding core material of confinement regions 2106 and 2104 respectively.
  • the divergence distribution may be varied. The design shown in FIG. 21 allows the intensity distribution and the divergence distribution to be varied somewhat independently by selecting both a particular confinement region and the divergence distribution within that conferment region (because each confinement region may include a divergence structure).
  • the adjusted divergence of the beam is conserved in second length of fiber 2100 , which is configured to deliver the adjusted beam to the process head, another optical system, or the work piece.
  • Forming the divergence structures 2114 and 2118 with a graded or non-constant index enables tuning of the divergence profile of the beam propagating in second length of fiber 2100 .
  • An adjusted beam characteristic such as a radiance profile and/or divergence profile may be conserved as it is delivered to a process head by the second fiber.
  • an adjusted beam characteristic such as a radiance profile and/or divergence profile may be conserved or further adjusted as it is routed by the second fiber through a fiber-to-fiber coupler (“FFC”) and/or fiber-to-fiber switch (“FFS”) and to a process fiber, which delivers the beam to the process head or the work piece.
  • FFC fiber-to-fiber coupler
  • FFS fiber-to-fiber switch
  • FIGS. 26-28 are cross-sectional views illustrating examples of fibers and fiber RIPs configured to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics of a beam propagating in an azimuthally asymmetric second length of fiber wherein the beam characteristics are adjusted responsive to perturbation of a first length of fiber coupled to the second length of fiber and/or perturbation of the beam by a perturbation device 110 .
  • These azimuthally asymmetric designs are merely examples and are not an exhaustive recitation of the variety of fiber RIPs that may be used to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics within an azimuthally asymmetric fiber.
  • claimed subject matter is not limited to the examples provided herein.
  • any of a variety of first lengths of fiber e.g., like those described above
  • any azimuthally asymmetric second length of fiber e.g., like those described in FIGS. 26-28 ).
  • FIG. 26 illustrates RIPs at various azimuthal angles of a cross-section through an elliptical fiber 2600 .
  • elliptical fiber 2600 has a first RIP 2604 .
  • elliptical fiber 2600 has a second RIP 2608 .
  • elliptical fiber 2600 has a third RIP 2612 .
  • First, second, and third RIPs 2604 , 2608 , and 2612 are all different.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates RIPs at various azimuthal angles of a cross-section through a multicore fiber 2700 .
  • multicore fiber 2700 has a first RIP 2704 .
  • multicore fiber 2700 has a second RIP 2708 .
  • First and second RIPs 2704 and 2708 are different.
  • perturbation device 110 may act in multiple planes in order to launch the adjusted beam into different regions of an azimuthally asymmetric second fiber.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates RIPs at various azimuthal angles of a cross-section through a fiber 2800 having at least one crescent shaped core. In some cases, the corners of the crescent may be rounded, flattened, or otherwise shaped, which may minimize optical loss.
  • fiber 2800 has a first RIP 2804 .
  • fiber 2800 has a second RIP 2808 .
  • First and second RIPs 2804 and 2808 are different.
  • FIG. 22A illustrates an example of a laser system 2200 including a VBC fiber assembly 2202 configured to provide variable beam characteristics.
  • VBC fiber assembly 2202 comprises a first length of fiber 104 , second length of fiber 108 , and a perturbation device 110 .
  • VBC fiber assembly 2202 is disposed between feeding fiber 2212 (i.e., the output fiber from the laser source) and VBC delivery fiber 2240 .
  • VBC delivery fiber 2240 may comprise second length of fiber 108 or an extension of second length of fiber 108 that modifies, maintains, and/or confines adjusted beam characteristics.
  • Beam 2210 is coupled into VBC fiber assembly 2202 via feeding fiber 2212 .
  • VBC Fiber assembly 2202 is configured to vary the characteristics of beam 2210 in accordance with the various examples described above.
  • VBC fiber assembly 2202 The output of VBC fiber assembly 2202 is adjusted beam 2214 which is coupled into VBC delivery fiber 2240 .
  • VBC delivery fiber 2240 delivers adjusted beam 2214 to free-space optics assembly 2208 , which then couples adjusted beam 2214 into a process fiber 2204 .
  • Adjusted beam 2214 is then delivered to process head 2206 by process fiber 2204 .
  • the process head can include guided wave optics (such as fibers and fiber coupler), free space optics such as lenses, mirrors, optical filters, diffraction gratings), beam scan assemblies such as galvanometer scanners, polygonal mirror scanners, or other scanning systems that are used to shape the adjusted beam 2214 and deliver the shaped beam to a workpiece.
  • one or more of the free-space optics of free-space optics assembly 2208 may be disposed in an FFC or other beam coupler 2216 to perform a variety of optical manipulations of an adjusted beam 2214 (represented in FIG. 22A with different dashing than beam 2210 ).
  • free-space optics assembly 2208 may preserve the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2214 .
  • Process fiber 2204 may have the same RIP as VBC delivery fiber 2240 .
  • the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2214 may be preserved all the way to process head 2206 .
  • Process fiber 2204 may comprise a RIP similar to any of the second lengths of fiber described above, including confinement regions.
  • free-space optics assembly 2208 may change the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2214 by, for example, increasing or decreasing the divergence, the beam diameter, and/or the spot size of adjusted beam 2214 (e.g., by magnifying or demagnifying adjusted beam 2214 ) and/or otherwise further modifying adjusted beam 2214 .
  • process fiber 2204 may have a different RIP than VBC delivery fiber 2240 . Accordingly, the RIP of process fiber 2204 may be selected to preserve additional adjustment of adjusted beam 2214 made by the free-space optics of free-space optics assembly 2208 to generate a twice adjusted beam 2224 (represented in FIG. 22B with different dashing than adjusted beam 2214 ).
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a laser system 2300 including VBC fiber assembly 2302 disposed between feeding fiber 2312 and VBC delivery fiber 2340 .
  • beam 2310 is coupled into VBC fiber assembly 2302 via feeding fiber 2312 .
  • VBC Fiber assembly 2302 includes a first length of fiber 104 , second length of fiber 108 , and a perturbation device 110 and is configured to vary characteristics of beam 2310 in accordance with the various examples described above.
  • VBC Fiber assembly 2302 generates adjusted beam 2314 output by VBC delivery fiber 2340 .
  • VBC delivery fiber 2340 comprises a second length of fiber 108 of fiber for modifying, maintaining, and/or confining adjusted beam characteristics in a VBC fiber assembly 2302 in accordance with the various examples described above (see FIGS.
  • VBC delivery fiber 2340 couples adjusted beam 2314 into beam switch (“FFS”) 2332 , which then couples its various output beams to one or more of multiple process fibers 2304 , 2320 , and 2322 .
  • FFS beam switch
  • Process fibers 2304 , 2320 , and 2322 deliver adjusted beams 2314 , 2328 , and 2330 to respective process heads 2306 , 2324 , and 2326 .
  • beam switch 2332 includes one or more sets of free-space optics 2308 , 2316 , and 2318 configured to perform a variety of optical manipulations of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • Free-space optics 2308 , 2316 , and 2318 may preserve or vary adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • adjusted beam 2314 may be maintained by the free-space optics or adjusted further.
  • Process fibers 2304 , 2320 , and 2322 may have the same or a different RIP as VBC delivery fiber 2340 , depending on whether it is desirable to preserve or further modify a beam passing from the free-space optics assemblies 2308 , 2316 , and 2318 to respective process fibers 2304 , 2320 , and 2322 .
  • one or more beam portions of beam 2310 are coupled to a workpiece without adjustment, or different beam portions are coupled to respective VBC fiber assemblies so that beam portions associated with a plurality of beam characteristics can be provided for simultaneous workpiece processing.
  • beam 2310 can be switched to one or more of a set of VBC fiber assemblies.
  • Routing adjusted beam 2314 through any of free-space optics assemblies 2308 , 2316 , and 2318 enables delivery of a variety of additionally adjusted beams to process heads 2306 , 2324 , and 2326 . Therefore, laser system 2300 provides additional degrees of freedom for varying the characteristics of a beam, as well as switching the beam between process heads (“time sharing”) and/or delivering the beam to multiple process heads simultaneously (“power sharing”).
  • free-space optics in beam switch 2332 may direct adjusted beam 2314 to free-space optics 2316 configured to preserve the adjusted characteristics of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • Process fiber 2304 may have the same RIP as VBC delivery fiber 2340 .
  • the beam delivered to process head 2306 will be a preserved adjusted beam 2314 .
  • beam switch 2332 may direct adjusted beam 2314 to free-space optics 2318 configured to preserve the adjusted characteristics of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • Process fiber 2320 may have a different RIP than VBC delivery fiber 2340 and may be configured with divergence altering structures as described with respect to FIGS. 20 and 21 to provide additional adjustments to the divergence distribution of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • the beam delivered to process head 2324 will be a twice adjusted beam 2328 having a different beam divergence profile than adjusted beam 2314 .
  • Process fibers 2304 , 2320 , and/or 2322 may comprise a RIP similar to any of the second lengths of fiber described above, including confinement regions or a wide variety of other RIPs, and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • free-space optics beam switch 2332 may direct adjusted beam 2314 to free-space optics 2308 configured to change the beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • Process fiber 2322 may have a different RIP than VBC delivery fiber 2340 and may be configured to preserve (or alternatively further modify) the new further adjusted characteristics of adjusted beam 2314 .
  • the beam delivered to process head 2326 will be a twice adjusted beam 2330 having different beam characteristics (due to the adjusted divergence profile and/or intensity profile) than adjusted beam 2314 .
  • the optics in the FFC or FFS may adjust the spatial profile and/or divergence profile by magnifying or demagnifying the adjusted beam 2214 before launching into the process fiber. They may also adjust the spatial profile and/or divergence profile via other optical transformations. They may also adjust the launch position into the process fiber. These methods may be used alone or in combination.
  • FIGS. 22A, 22B, and 23 merely provide examples of combinations of adjustments to beam characteristics using free-space optics and various combinations of fiber RIPs to preserve or modify adjusted beams 2214 and 2314 .
  • the examples provided above are not exhaustive and are meant for illustrative purposes only. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates various examples of perturbation devices, assemblies, or methods (for simplicity referred to collectively herein as “perturbation device 110 ”) for perturbing a VBC fiber 200 and/or an optical beam propagating in VBC fiber 200 according to various examples provided herein.
  • Perturbation device 110 may be any of a variety of devices, methods, and/or assemblies configured to enable adjustment of beam characteristics of a beam propagating in VBC fiber 200 .
  • perturbation device 110 may be a mandrel 2402 , a micro-bend 2404 in the VBC fiber 200 , flexible tubing 2406 , an acousto-optic transducer 2408 , a thermal device 2410 , a piezoelectric device 2412 (e.g., transducer), a grating 2414 , a clamp 2416 (or other fastener), a mandrel-roller combination 2432 , or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • perturbation devices 110 are merely examples of perturbation devices 110 and not an exhaustive listing of perturbation devices 110 , and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Mandrel 2402 may be used to perturb VBC fiber 200 by providing a form about which VBC fiber 200 may be bent. As discussed above, reducing the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 moves the intensity distribution of the beam radially outward.
  • mandrel 2402 may be stepped or conically shaped to provide discrete bend radii levels.
  • mandrel 2402 may comprise a cone shape without steps to provide continuous bend radii for more granular control of the bend radius.
  • the radius of curvature of mandrel 2402 may be constant (e.g., a cylindrical form) or non-constant (e.g., an oval-shaped form).
  • VBC fiber 200 and mandrel 2402 may be configured to change the intensity distribution within the first fiber predictably (e.g., in proportion to the length over which the fiber is bent and/or the bend radius).
  • Rollers 250 may move up and down along a track 2442 on platform 2434 to change the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 .
  • Clamps 2416 may be used to guide and control the bending of VBC fiber 200 with or without a mandrel 2402 .
  • Clamps 2416 may move up and down along a track 2442 or platform 2446 .
  • Clamps 2416 may also swivel to change bend radius, tension, or direction of VBC fiber 200 .
  • Controller 2448 may control the movement of clamps 2416 .
  • perturbation device 110 may be flexible tubing 2406 and may guide bending of VBC fiber 200 with or without a mandrel 2402 .
  • Flexible tubing 2406 may encase VBC fiber 200 .
  • Flexible tubing 2406 may be made of a variety of materials and may be manipulated using piezoelectric transducers controlled by controller 2444 . In another example, clamps or other fasteners may be used to move flexible tubing 2406 .
  • Micro-bend 2404 in VBC fiber 200 is a local perturbation caused by lateral mechanical stress on the fiber. Micro-bending can cause mode coupling and/or transitions from one confinement region to another confinement region within a fiber, resulting in varied beam characteristics of the beam propagating in a VBC fiber 200 .
  • Mechanical stress may be applied by an actuator 2436 that is controlled by controller 2440 .
  • this is merely an example of a method for inducing mechanical stress in VBC fiber 200 and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Acousto-optic transducer (“AOT”) 2408 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in the VBC fiber 200 using an acoustic wave.
  • the perturbation is caused by the modification of the refractive index of the fiber by the oscillating mechanical pressure of an acoustic wave.
  • the period and strength of the acoustic wave are related to the acoustic wave frequency and amplitude, allowing dynamic control of the acoustic perturbation.
  • a perturbation device 110 including AOT 2408 may be configured to vary the beam characteristics of a beam propagating in the fiber.
  • piezoelectric transducer 2418 may create the acoustic wave and may be controlled by controller or driver 2420 .
  • the acoustic wave induced in AOT 2408 may be modulated to change and/or control the beam characteristics of the optical beam in VBC fiber 200 in real-time.
  • this is merely an example of a method for creating and controlling an AOT 2408 and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Thermal device 2410 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in VBC fiber 200 using heat.
  • the perturbation is caused by the modification of the RIP of the fiber induced by heat.
  • Perturbation may be dynamically controlled by controlling an amount of heat transferred to the fiber and the length over which the heat is applied.
  • a perturbation device 110 including thermal device 2410 may be configured to vary a range of beam characteristics.
  • Thermal device 2410 may be controlled by controller 2450 .
  • Piezoelectric device 2412 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in a VBC fiber using piezoelectric action.
  • the perturbation is caused by the modification of the RIP of the fiber induced by a piezoelectric material attached to the fiber.
  • the piezoelectric material in the form of a jacket around the bare fiber may apply tension or compression to the fiber, modifying its refractive index via the resulting changes in density.
  • Perturbation may be dynamically controlled by controlling a voltage to the piezoelectric device 2412 .
  • a perturbation device 110 including piezoelectric device 2412 may be configured to vary the beam characteristics over a particular range.
  • piezoelectric device 2412 may be configured to displace VBC fiber 200 in a variety of directions (e.g., axially, radially, and/or laterally) depending on a variety of factors, including how the piezoelectric device 2412 is attached to VBC fiber 200 , the direction of the polarization of the piezoelectric materials, the applied voltage, etc. Additionally, bending of VBC fiber 200 is possible using the piezoelectric device 2412 . For example, driving a length of piezoelectric material having multiple segments comprising opposing electrodes can cause a piezoelectric device 2412 to bend in a lateral direction. Voltage applied to piezoelectric device 2412 by electrode 2424 may be controlled by controller 2422 to control displacement of VBC fiber 200 .
  • Displacement may be modulated to change and/or control the beam characteristics of the optical beam in VBC fiber 200 in real-time.
  • this is merely an example of a method of controlling displacement of a VBC fiber 200 using a piezoelectric device 2412 and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Gratings 2414 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in a VBC fiber 200 .
  • a grating 2414 can be written into a fiber by inscribing a periodic variation of the refractive index into the core.
  • Gratings 2414 such as fiber Bragg gratings can operate as optical filters or as reflectors.
  • a long-period grating can induce transitions among co-propagating fiber modes. The radiance, intensity profile, and/or divergence profile of a beam comprised of one or more modes can thus be adjusted using a long-period grating to couple one or more of the original modes to one or more different modes having different radiance and/or divergence profiles.
  • Adjustment is achieved by varying the periodicity or amplitude of the refractive index grating. Methods such as varying the temperature, bend radius, and/or length (e.g., stretching) of the fiber Bragg grating can be used for such adjustment.
  • VBC fiber 200 having gratings 2414 may be coupled to stage 2426 .
  • Stage 2426 may be configured to execute any of a variety of functions and may be controlled by controller 2428 .
  • stage 2426 may be coupled to VBC fiber 200 with fasteners 2430 and may be configured to stretch and/or bend VBC fiber 200 using fasteners 2430 for leverage.
  • Stage 2426 may have an embedded thermal device and may change the temperature of VBC fiber 200 .
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example process 2500 for adjusting and/or maintaining beam characteristics within a fiber without the use of free-space optics to adjust the beam characteristics.
  • a first length of fiber and/or an optical beam are perturbed to adjust one or more optical beam characteristics.
  • Process 2500 moves to block 2504 , where the optical beam is launched into a second length of fiber.
  • Process 2500 moves to block 2506 , where the optical beam having the adjusted beam characteristics is propagated in the second length of fiber.
  • Process 2500 moves to block 2508 , where at least a portion of the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam are maintained within one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber.
  • the first and second lengths of fiber may be comprised of the same fiber, or they may be different fibers.
  • a system for processing can comprise, for example, VBC fiber 100 , including first length of fiber 104 and second length of fiber 108 , and perturbation device 110 in order to control one or more beam characteristics of optical beam 102 , per FIG. 1 .
  • Such a system for processing can comprise, for example, VBC fiber 200 , including first length of fiber 204 and second length of fiber 208 , and perturbation device 210 in order to control one or more beam characteristics of optical beam 202 , per FIG. 2 .
  • Such a system for processing can comprise, for example, first length of fiber 1100 , per FIG. 11 ; first length of fiber 2100 , per FIG. 12 ; first length of fiber 1300 , per FIG. 13 ; first length of fiber 1400 , per FIG. 14A ; first length of fiber 1406 , per FIG. 14B ; first length of fiber 1500 , per FIG. 15 ; or first length of fiber 1600 , per FIG. 16 .
  • Such a system for processing can comprise, for example, second length of fiber 1700 , per FIG. 17 ; second length of fiber 1800 , per FIG. 18 ; second length of fiber 1900 , per FIG. 19 ; second length of fiber 2000 , per FIG. 20 ; or second length of fiber 2100 , per FIG. 21 .
  • a first length of fiber, a second length of fiber, and a perturbation device can be combined in a fiber assembly, such as VBC fiber assembly 2202 , per FIG. 22A or FIG. 22B ; or VBC fiber assembly 2302 , per FIG. 23 .
  • a perturbation device e.g., perturbation device 110
  • the perturbation device can modify one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam (e.g., optical beam 102 ).
  • the modified one or more beam characteristics can include, for example, one or more of angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, divergence distribution, BPP, intensity distribution, luminance, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, or spot size, or any combination thereof.
  • the perturbing effectuated by the perturbation device can include one or more of bending, bending over a particular length, micro-bending, applying acousto-optic excitation, thermal perturbation, stretching, applying piezoelectric perturbation, applying clamps (or other fasteners), using a grating, or any combination thereof.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates various examples of such perturbation devices.
  • Such a system for processing can further comprise, for example, one or more optical beam sources configured to generate optical beams, such as laser beams associated with fiber-coupled lasers (e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, YAG lasers), per FIGS. 22A, 22B , and/or 23 .
  • fiber-coupled lasers e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, YAG lasers
  • Such a system for processing can further comprise, for example, one or more beam couplers, beam switches, free-space optics assemblies, process heads, or any combination thereof.
  • characteristics of an adjusted beam (e.g., adjusted beam 2214 ) from a VBC fiber assembly can be preserved in a delivery fiber (e.g., VBC delivery fiber 2240 ), free-space optics assembly (e.g., free-space optics assembly 2208 ), process fiber (e.g., process fiber 2204 ), and/or process head (process head 2206 ), per FIG. 22A .
  • characteristics of an adjusted beam (e.g., adjusted beam 2214 ) from a VBC fiber assembly can be preserved in a delivery fiber (e.g., VBC delivery fiber 2240 ), but then further modified in a free-space optics assembly (e.g., free-space optics assembly 2208 ), and then the twice-adjusted beam can be preserved in a process fiber (e.g., process fiber 2204 ) and/or process head (process head 2206 ), per FIG. 228 .
  • characteristics of an adjusted beam (e.g., adjusted beam 2314 ) from a VBC fiber assembly can be preserved in a delivery fiber (e.g., VBC delivery fiber 2340 ), but then switched using a beam switch (e.g., beam switch 2332 ) and preserved or further modified in one or more free-space optics assemblies (e.g., free-space optics assemblies 2308 , 2316 , 2318 ), and then the once-or-twice-adjusted beams can be preserved in one or more process fibers (e.g., process fiber 2304 , 2320 , 2322 ) and/or one or more process heads (e.g., process head 2306 , 2324 , 2326 ), per FIG. 23 .
  • Such a system provides for options such as power sharing and time sharing as discussed.
  • FIG. 29 depicts a first example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam.
  • the processing can include additive processing and/or manufacture of a product.
  • the processing can include one or more of ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding, or any combination thereof.
  • the optical beam is launched into a first length of fiber having a first RIP.
  • one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber.
  • Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 2904 ), in the second length of fiber (block 2908 ), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 2904 and 2908 ).
  • the optical beam is coupled from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and one or more confinement regions.
  • the first RIP can differ from the second RIP; but when the second length of fiber has two or more confinement regions, the first RIP can be the same as or differ from the second RIP.
  • the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the second length of fiber.
  • Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, azimuthal intensity distribution.
  • the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 2904 ), in the second length of fiber (block 2908 ), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 2904 and 2908 ).
  • the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam are confined within the one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber.
  • an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam is generated from the second length of fiber.
  • FIG. 30 depicts a second example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam.
  • the processing can include additive processing and/or manufacture of a product.
  • the process can include one or more of ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding, or any combination thereof.
  • the optical beam is launched into a first length of fiber having a first RIP.
  • one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber.
  • Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 3004 ), in the second length of fiber (block 3008 ), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 3004 and 3008 ).
  • the optical beam is coupled from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and two or more confinement regions.
  • the first RIP can be the same as or differ from the second RIP.
  • the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the second length of fiber.
  • Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, azimuthal intensity distribution.
  • the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 3004 ), in the second length of fiber (block 3008 ), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 3004 and 3008 ).
  • the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam are confined within the two or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber.
  • an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam is generated from the second length of fiber.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an angular distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the angular distribution can be adjusted to increase or decrease the divergence, to change the axis of symmetry, to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical, or to change the ratio of asymmetry.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an azimuthal intensity distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the azimuthal intensity distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical, or to change the ratio of asymmetry.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam diameter of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the beam diameter can be greater than or equal to 1 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 1,000 ⁇ m; greater than or equal to 1 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 100 ⁇ m (e.g., for additive manufacturing); greater than or equal to 100 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 500 ⁇ m (e.g., for welding); or greater than or equal to 500 ⁇ m and less than or equal to 1,000 ⁇ m (e.g., for cladding).
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam divergence distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the beam divergence distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a BPP of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the BPP can be greater than or equal to 1 mm-mrad and less than or equal to 50 mm-mrad; greater than or equal to 1 mm-mrad and less than or equal to 10 mm-mrad; or greater than or equal to 10 mm-mrad and less than or equal to 50 mm-mrad.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top) of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • a beam profile e.g., Gaussian, flat-top
  • the beam profile can be adjusted to make it Gaussian or more Gaussian, flat-topped or more flat-topped, ring/donut shaped, or an azimuthally non-symmetric power distribution profile.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam shape of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the beam shape can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a divergence of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the divergence can be greater than or equal to 10 mrad and less than or equal to 500 mrad; greater than or equal to 10 mrad and less than or equal to 200 mrad (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); greater than or equal to 50 mrad and less than or equal to 200 mrad (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); or greater than or equal to 50 mrad and less than or equal to 500 mrad (e.g., glass- or polymer-guided optical beam).
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a divergence profile of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the divergence profile can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an intensity distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the intensity distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a luminance of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an M 2 factor of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the M 2 factor can be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 100; greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 10; greater than or equal to 3 and less than or equal to 30; greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 20; or greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 100.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an NA of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the NA can be greater than or equal to 0.01 and less than or equal to 0.50; greater than or equal to 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.25; greater than or equal to 0.01 and less than or equal to 0.20 (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); greater than or equal to 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.20 (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); or greater than or equal to 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.50 (e.g., glass- or polymer-guided optical beam).
  • 0.20 e.g., glass-guided optical beam
  • 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.20 e.g., glass-guided optical beam
  • 0.50 e.g., glass- or polymer-guided optical beam
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an optical intensity profile of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving. glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the optical intensity profile can be adjusted to make to shift intensity toward or away from a center of the output beam.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting an optical mode (e.g., filtering) of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • an optical mode e.g., filtering
  • the optical mode can be adjusted to filter out higher order modes from the output beam, or to intentionally add higher order mode shapes.
  • the method can further comprise: increasing power density of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, marking, patterning, roughening, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. In some examples, the method can further comprise: decreasing power density of the output beam for cutting, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, smoothing, surface texturing, and/or trepanning one or more parts of the product.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a radial beam position of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the radial beam position can be closer to a center of a process fiber or farther from the center of the process fiber.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a radiance of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the method can further comprise: adjusting a spatial profile distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the spatial profile distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • the method can further comprise: increasing beam diameter and/or spot size of the output beam for heat-treating and/or smoothing one or more parts of a product.
  • a larger beam diameter and/or spot size can optimize build rate by covering more area during a given period of time, while a smaller beam diameter and/or spot size can improve the quality of an edge or surface qualities of a product being manufactured. Such improvements can drastically enhance build rate and/or feature resolution of the product.
  • the spot shape can vary, depending on intended use.
  • the spot shape can be round, elliptical, donut shaped, or any combination thereof (e.g., a round portion in the center surrounded by a donut shape).
  • the spot shape can be azimuthally symmetric or azimuthally asymmetric.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a plan view of a build layer 3100 having a first region 3102 and a second region 3104 .
  • a scan direction 3106 provides an example path of an optical beam as it travels across the build layer 3100 . While only a single pass of the optical beam is illustrated, multiple passes can be made across all or a portion of the build layer 3100 , as desired, using almost any combination of scan directions to yield virtually any desired scan pattern. In addition, passes can be linear or non-linear, as desired. For optimum flexibility, one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during any given pass.
  • first region 3102 in which it can be desired to optimize surface roughness.
  • a smaller beam diameter and/or spot size can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator, to improve the quality of the surface finish in order to optimize surface roughness in first region 3102 .
  • second region 3104 in which it can be desired to optimize build rate.
  • a larger beam diameter and/or spot size can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator, to optimize build rate by covering more area during a given period of time in second region 3104 .
  • a smaller beam diameter and/or spot size can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator, to improve the quality of the surface finish in order to optimize surface roughness in first region 3102 .
  • every portion of the material for the 3D object is either exposed or lies immediately under the surface of a thinly deposited or processed layer, which is often referred to as a “build layer” in the additive manufacturing art.
  • This level of access to the material for the 3D object of the build layer allows for additional processing by an optical (e.g., laser) beam.
  • a first layer of particles is positioned on a build plate.
  • the particles can be free-flowing (e.g., a dry powder), in the form of a paste or wire (e.g., solid particles), or in any other form suitable for additive manufacturing.
  • the particles can comprise metal materials, non-metal materials, or mixtures of both.
  • Particles comprising metal materials can include any metals or metal-containing compounds, including alloys and mixtures of various metallic compounds (e.g., metal oxides, metal carbides, metal nitrides, etc.) that are suitable for additive manufacturing.
  • Non-metals can include any non-metal materials suitable for additive manufacturing, such as, for example, ceramics, polymers, or waxes.
  • the first layer of particles is heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse the particles together to form a first build layer.
  • the optical beam employed for exposing the first build layer is emitted from an optical fiber, such as from any of the lasers disclosed in this application.
  • One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the exposing of the first build layer. As disclosed in this application, the modifying of the optical beam occurs prior to the optical beam being outputted from the optical fiber.
  • a second layer of particles is positioned on the exposed first build layer.
  • the second layer of particles is heated by the optical beam sufficiently to fuse the particles together to form a second build layer.
  • the optical beam employed for exposing the second build layer is emitted from the optical fiber, such as from any of the lasers disclosed in this application.
  • One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the exposing of the second build layer. As disclosed in this application, the modifying of the optical beam occurs prior to the optical beam being outputted from the optical fiber.
  • the positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles can be repeated as necessary to form the 3D object.
  • the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber can be performed by any of the techniques disclosed in this application.
  • the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics can comprise modifying one or more of angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M 2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics is carried out without the use of free-space optics, as disclosed in this application.
  • the resulting ability to quickly modify the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can allow, for example, switching among beam shapes on the fly (e.g., without slowing or stopping a pass of the optical beam), thereby providing corresponding manufacturing efficiencies, and allowing efficient tailoring of temperature profiles and the resulting stress states in a 3D object being manufactured.
  • free-space optics can allow such modifications over times on the order of hundreds of milliseconds, whereas in-fiber solutions could allow such modifications over times on the order of hundreds of microseconds or single-digit milliseconds.
  • more than one laser can be used for the method of processing (e.g., a first laser for pre-heating powder, a second laser for fusing powder, and/or a third laser for post-heating powder).
  • more than one laser with a variable BPP system as disclosed in this application could provide enhanced performance (e.g., improved part quality, part utility, and/or production speed) and/or increased flexibility (e.g., in process, machine, or plant design and/or operation).
  • more than one laser can be used for the method of processing (e.g., stopping at points while a 3D object is being built using a first laser, and using a second laser to anneal, normalize, solutionize, stress relieve, temper, etc. the 3D object).
  • the second laser could emit a larger, uniform beam and, thus, would not require the variable BPP system as disclosed in this application.
  • the ability to quickly modify the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, using a laser with a variable BPP system as disclosed in this application, would allow the same laser to be used for the entire method of processing, thereby providing corresponding manufacturing efficiencies.
  • FIG. 32 depicts an elevation view of a 3D object 3200 manufactured using a powder bed process.
  • the powder bed process can use one or more layers, such as first layer 3202 a, second layer 3202 b, third layer 3202 c, fourth layer 3202 d, fifth layer 3202 e , sixth layer 3202 f, seventh layer 3202 g, eighth layer 3202 h, ninth layer 3202 i, tenth layer 3202 j, and eleventh layer 3202 k.
  • any number of layers can be used.
  • the number of layers can be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 100,000; greater than or equal to 10 and less than or equal to 10,000; or be greater than or equal to 100 and less than or equal to 1,000.
  • the one or more layers can comprise powder that is the same in each layer, different in each layer, the same in two or more layers, different in two or more layers, the same in alternating layers, different in alternating layers, the same in bottom and top layers, etc.
  • supporting structures can be incorporated that stay in place until 3D object 3200 is completed (after which the supporting structures are removed).
  • the powder bed process can use one or more supporting structures, such as first supporting structures 3204 a, second supporting structures 3204 b, and third supporting structures 3204 c.
  • any number of supporting structures can be used.
  • the number of supporting structures can be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 1,000,000, but the number of supporting structures could exceed 1,000,000.
  • optical beam source 3206 can generate optical beam 3208 to selectively heat the one or more layers (e.g., first layer 3202 a, second layer 3202 b, third layer 3202 c, fourth layer 3202 d, fifth layer 3202 e, sixth layer 3202 f, seventh layer 3202 g , eighth layer 3202 h, ninth layer 3202 i, tenth layer 3202 j, or eleventh layer 3202 k, or any combination thereof) of powder sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form 3D object 3200 , first supporting structures 3304 a, second supporting structures 3204 b, and/or third supporting structures 3204 c.
  • layers e.g., first layer 3202 a, second layer 3202 b, third layer 3202 c, fourth layer 3202 d, fifth layer 3202 e, sixth layer 3202 f, seventh layer 3202 g , eighth layer 3202 h, ninth layer 3202 i, tenth layer 3202 j, or eleventh layer 3202 k, or any combination thereof
  • FIG. 33 depicts a plan view of the 3D object 3200 at a first point during the powder bed process.
  • the 3D object 3200 starts with a layer of particles 3300 forming a powder bed positioned on a build plate (not shown) so as to be exposed.
  • the layer of particles 3300 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3302 of 3D object 3200 and four first supporting structures 3304 a.
  • One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3300 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • the remaining particles in the layer of particles 3300 of the powder bed remain unfused.
  • the positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles is repeated, continuing to build the first portion 3302 of 3D object 3200 and the four first supporting structures 3304 a.
  • FIG. 34 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a second point during the powder bed process.
  • a layer of particles 3400 is positioned on the previous layer so as to be exposed.
  • the layer of particles 3400 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3402 of 3D object 3200 , a second portion 3406 of 3D object 3200 , four first supporting structures 3404 a, and four second supporting structures 3404 b.
  • One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3400 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when the material underlying a layer of particles is unfused powder as opposed to when the material underlying the layer of particles is a solid of fused material; different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • the remaining particles in the layer of particles 3400 of the powder bed remain unfused.
  • the positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles is repeated, continuing to build the first portion 3402 of 3D object 3200 , the second portion 3406 of 3D object 3200 , and the four second supporting structures 3404 b (the four first supporting structures 3404 a do not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3400 ).
  • FIG. 35 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a third point during the powder bed process.
  • a layer of particles 3500 is positioned on the previous layer so as to be exposed.
  • the layer of particles 3500 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3502 of 3D object 3200 , a second portion 3506 of 3D object 3200 , a third portion 3508 of 3D object 3200 , four second supporting structures 3504 b, and four third supporting structures 3504 c (the four first supporting structures 3404 a did not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3400 , but are shown for clarity).
  • One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3500 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when the material underlying a layer of particles is unfused powder as opposed to when the material underlying the layer of particles is a solid of fused material; different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • the remaining particles in the layer of particles 3500 of the powder bed remain unfused.
  • the positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles is repeated, continuing to build the first portion 3502 of 3D object 3200 , the second portion 3506 of 3D object 3200 , the third portion 3508 of 3D object 3200 , and the four third supporting structures 3504 c (the four second supporting structures 3504 b do not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3500 ).
  • FIG. 36 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a fourth point during the powder bed process.
  • a layer of particles 3600 is positioned on the previous layer so as to be exposed.
  • the layer of particles 3600 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3602 of 3D object 3200 , a second portion 3606 of 3D object 3200 , a third portion 3608 of 3D object 3200 , a fourth portion 3610 of 3D object 3200 , and four third supporting structures 3604 c (the four first supporting structures 3404 a did not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3400 and the four second supporting structures 3504 b did not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3500 , but are shown for clarity).
  • One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3600 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when the material underlying a layer of particles is unfused powder as opposed to when the material underlying the layer of particles is a solid of fused material; different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • the remaining particles in the layer of particles 3600 of the powder bed remain unfused.
  • the positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles are not repeated, because 3D object 3200 is now complete.
  • the method can further comprise: using the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the using of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • FIG. 37 depicts a plan view of a portion of a 3D object after fusing.
  • Portion 3710 of 3D object 3200 can be a product for which further processing is desired or required.
  • Such further processing can include, for example, one or more of ablating and/or engraving 3712 ; cutting 3714 ; drilling and/or trepanning 3716 ; heat-treating 3718 ; marking 3720 ; or engraving, patterning, roughening, and/or surface texturing 3722 , or any combination thereof.
  • FIG. 38A depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing.
  • 3D object 3200 can be a product for which further processing is desired or required.
  • FIG. 38B depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing and such further processing.
  • the further processing can include, for example, one or more of glazing, smoothing, or a combination thereof.
  • 3D object 3200 can have portions 3824 a , 3824 b that include significant irregularities.
  • one or more of glazing, smoothing, or a combination thereof can reduce the irregularities, for example, of portion 3824 b to that of portion 3824 c or similar.
  • laser cutting speed e.g., material feed rate
  • laser output power can affect kerf width.
  • kerf width increases for lower cutting speeds and higher laser powers.
  • high pressure assist gas can be used to prevent or limit oxidation reactions in the removal area, to evacuate melted material from the kerf, to add heat input to the process, or to remove heat from the process.
  • the assist gas and/or the pressure of the assist gas can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator from one or more sources.
  • the assist gas itself can include one or more of air, argon, helium, nitrogen, oxygen, other gases known to a person having ordinary skill in the art, or any combination thereof.
  • values of the assist gas pressure can range, for example, from less than 1 pound per square inch gage (“psig”) to more than 500 psig; greater than or equal to 1 psig and less than or equal to 10 psig; greater than or equal to 1 psig and less than or equal to 50 psig; or greater than or equal to 50 psig and less than or equal to 500 psig.
  • the pressure can be constant during a given processing or can be changed at least once during the processing, such as when changing the assist gas, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of a scan pattern.
  • the method can further comprise: modulating the output beam while ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • the modulating of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • Modulating of the output beam can involve starting and stopping of generation of the output beam (e.g., effectively turning the output beam on and off).
  • the output beam can be generated as a series of pulses. A pulse indicates that the output beam is being generated (e.g., is on), and the absence of a pulse indicates that the output beam is not being generated (e.g., is off).
  • the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency (typically expressed in cycles/second or Hertz (“Hz”).
  • the modulation frequency can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator from one or more discrete values or from a continuous range of values.
  • values of the modulation frequency can be, for example, greater than or equal to 1 Hz and less than or equal to 100,000 Hz (100 kHz); greater than or equal to 1 Hz and less than or equal to 500 Hz; greater than or equal to 500 Hz and less than or equal to 5,000 Hz (5 kHz); or greater than or equal to 5,000 Hz (5 kHz) and less than or equal to 100,000 Hz (100 kHz).
  • the modulation frequency can be constant during a given processing or can be changed at least once during the processing, such as when modifying the one or more beam characteristics and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of a scan pattern.
  • the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle, where the duty cycle is the fraction of a period during which the output beam is on (typically expressed in percent).
  • the duty cycle can influence heat input and/or the heating rate.
  • the duty cycle can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator from one or more discrete values or from a continuous range of values from 0% to 100%.
  • values of the duty cycle can include, for example, 0% (always off); 10%; 20%; 25%; 30%; 40%; 50% (half on, half off); 60%; 70%; 75%; 80%; 90%; or 100% (always on).
  • Values of the duty cycle also can include, for example, about 10%; about 20%; about 30%; about 40%; about 50%; about 60%; about 70%; about 80%; or about 90%.
  • the duty cycle can be constant during a given processing or can be changed at least once during the processing.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to fuse the powder.
  • pre-heat and/or post-heat the associated powder can be desirable to pre-heat and/or post-heat the associated powder, as well as to fuse the powder.
  • the pre-heating can raise the temperature of the associated powder in a powder bed and/or an associated substrate above 200° C. (e.g., for control of moisture), above 500° C. (e.g., for control of residual stresses), or above 1,000° C. (e.g., for control of microstructure evolution).
  • Such pre-heating can improve, for example, crack mitigation, distortion control, and/or microstructure control.
  • the higher temperatures generally correlate with the processing of metals, while the lower temperatures generally correlate with the processing of polymers.
  • the output beam can be used to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and also used to fuse the powder.
  • the output beam can be alternated back and forth between pre-heating the powder and fusing the powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the pre-heating can raise the temperature of the associated powder in a powder bed and/or an associated substrate above 100° C., above 300° C. (e.g., lower temperature melt alloys), or above 600° C. (higher temperature melt alloys).
  • the higher temperatures generally correlate with the processing of metals, while the lower temperatures generally correlate with the processing of polymers.
  • the output beam can be used to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and also used to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the output beam can be alternated back and forth between pre-heating the powder and post-heating the fused powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • the post-heating of the fused powder can help control the cooldown rate of the fused powder, improving ductility, reducing residual stresses, and reducing the propensity for cracking at least in portions of the fused powder.
  • a lack of post-heating effectively can quench the fused powder, increasing stress and improving hardness at least in portions of the fused powder.
  • the manner and amount of post-heating can be tailored to influence and/or control properties of the fused powder, in particular by modifying the one or more beam characteristics to provide fine tuning of the post-heating effects.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to fuse powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the output beam can be used to fuse the powder, and also used to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the output beam can be alternated back and forth between fusing the powder and post-heating the fused powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, using the output beam to fuse the powder, and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the pre-heating can raise the temperature of the associated powder in a powder bed and/or an associated substrate above 100° C., above 300° C. (e.g., lower temperature melt alloys), or above 600° C. (higher temperature melt alloys).
  • the higher temperatures generally correlate with the processing of metals, while the lower temperatures generally correlate with the processing of polymers.
  • the output beam can be used to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, to fuse the powder, and also used to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the output beam can be alternated between pre-heating the powder, fusing the powder, and post-heating the fused powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder. In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to fuse powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder. In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • variable BPP system as disclosed in this application can split the optical beam into two or more portions.
  • the variable BPP system can split the optical beam into a relatively small, higher power density central spot and a relatively large, lower power density ring surrounding the central spot.
  • the surrounding ring can pre-heat the powder bed, then the central spot can fuse the powder, and finally the surrounding ring can post-heat the fused powder.
  • variable BPP system as disclosed in this application can split the optical beam into other examples of two or more portions, as would be understood by a person having ordinary skill in the art. These other examples provide various combinations of pre-heating the powder bed, fusing the powder, and/or post-heating the fused powder.
  • the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics includes modifying one or more beam characteristics of at least one of the two or more portions.
  • a method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam can comprise: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first RIP; coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and two or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the two or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber.
  • the first RIP can be the same as the second RIP.

Abstract

A method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam may include: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first refractive-index profile (RIP); coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and one or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber. The first RIP may differ from the second RIP.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of international application PCT/US2017/034848, filed May 26, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/401,650, filed Sep. 29, 2016. This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/607,411, filed May 26, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/401,650, filed Sep. 29, 2016. This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/607,410, filed May 26, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/401,650, filed Sep. 29, 2016. This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/607,399, filed May 26, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/401,650, filed Sep. 29, 2016. All of the above applications are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The subject matter disclosed herein generally relates to methods of and systems for processing optical beams, such as laser beams associated with fiber-coupled lasers (e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, yttrium aluminum garnet (“YAG”) lasers). The subject matter disclosed herein also relates to methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics, such as beam diameter, spot size, divergence profile, spatial profile, beam shape, or the like, or any combination thereof, at an output, for example, of fiber-coupled lasers.
  • BACKGROUND
  • The use of high-power, fiber-coupled lasers continues to gain popularity for a variety of applications, such as materials processing, cutting, welding, and/or additive manufacturing. These lasers include, for example, fiber lasers, disk lasers, diode lasers, diode-pumped solid state lasers, and lamp-pumped solid state lasers. In these systems, optical power is delivered from the laser to a work piece via an optical fiber.
  • Various fiber-coupled laser materials processing tasks require different beam characteristics (e.g., spatial profiles and/or divergence profiles). For example, cutting thick metal and welding generally require a larger beam diameter or spot size than cutting thin metal. Ideally, the laser beam properties would be adjustable to enable optimized processing for these different tasks. Conventionally, users have two choices: (1) employ a laser system with fixed beam characteristics that can be used for different tasks but is not optimal for most of them (i.e., a compromise between performance and flexibility); or (2) purchase a laser system or accessories that offer variable beam characteristics but that add significant cost, size, weight, complexity, and perhaps performance degradation (e.g., optical loss or reduced speed due to delays involved while varying beam characteristics) or reliability degradation (e.g., reduced robustness or up-time). Currently available laser systems capable of varying beam characteristics typically require the use of free-space optics or other complex and expensive add-on mechanisms (e.g., zoom lenses, mirrors, translatable or motorized lenses, combiners, etc.) in order to vary beam characteristics. No solution appears to exist which provides the desired adjustability in beam characteristics that minimizes or eliminates reliance on the use of free-space optics or other extra components that add significant penalties in terms of cost, complexity, performance, and/or reliability. What is needed is an in-fiber apparatus for providing varying beam characteristics that does not require or minimizes the use of free-space optics and that can avoid significant cost, complexity, performance tradeoffs, and/or reliability degradation.
  • During additive manufacturing, standard laser beam shapes available on commercial additive manufacturing (“AM”) systems typically are not optimized for all the laser process capabilities that can be used during AM. Nor do commercial AM systems generally provide the ability to rapidly adjust laser beam properties during processing.
  • One of the factors determining the productivity of an additive system is the build rate. The term “build rate” refers to the time required to fuse a unit volume of, for example, powder or wire. The higher the build rate, the faster the productivity. However, higher build rates can produce (1) coarser resolution of final products, (2) higher heat input requirements, (3) higher residual stresses in final products, (4) undesirable microstructures in final products, and/or (5) reductions in mechanical properties of final products. This trade-off in build rate and part quality helps to define the value of an AM tool. Typically, different parameters are used for areas of the build where different build rates are required (for example contouring versus bulk filling, or dissimilar cladding versus similar deposition). The parameters that are adjusted are usually focus position, laser power, and/or speed. These limited variables produce limited process benefits.
  • There is an issue with doing these adjustments depending on what the X-Y position is in the plane being created. For example, with powder bed fusion, a layer of powder may overlay what could be an existing fused structure or unfused powder, and control over the laser parameters as the laser beam moves across these structures would provide a better final part (less distortion, less porosity, better dimensional accuracy). This control also pertains to the finished part roughness, as that is tied to the resolution used to create the edge of each layer.
  • Typically, standard commercial AM systems do not have the capability to pre-heat a powder bed or a substrate above 400° C. This pre-heating is generally accomplished from the exterior of the build envelope (e.g., using a heated platform or chamber). Thermal energy typically is generated electrically (resistive or inductive). The unfused powder is very insulative. The shape and density of the structure being built can vary from build-to-build. The complications associated with these factors make it difficult to provide a uniform and repeatable temperature in the build volume with such traditional heating methods.
  • At the same time, a laser source and associated beam delivery system usually are developed for a single process: welding, cutting, cladding, drilling, marking, etc. As a result, an expensive laser AM tool may be capable of being used in only one process. The versatility and value of such an AM tool may be severely limited by this single-process capability.
  • SUMMARY
  • At least disclosed herein are methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics.
  • In some examples, a method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam can comprise: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first refractive-index profile (“RIP”); coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and one or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber. The first RIP can differ from the second RIP.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a BPP of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam quality factor (M2 factor) of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: modulating the output beam while ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. The modulating of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • In some examples, the output beam can be generated as a series of pulses, one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modified in a series of pulses, or the output beam can be generated as a series of pulses and one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modified in a series of pulses.
  • In some examples, the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency, one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency, or the output beam and one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency.
  • In some examples, the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle, one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle, or the output beam and one or more characteristics of the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: using the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. The using of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: increasing power density of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, marking, patterning, roughening, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. The increasing of the power density can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: decreasing power density of the output beam for cladding, cutting, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, smoothing, surface texturing, and/or trepanning one or more parts of a product. The decreasing of the power density can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: increasing beam diameter of the output beam for heat-treating and/or smoothing one or more parts of a product. The increasing of the beam diameter can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to fuse the powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to fuse powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, using the output beam to fuse the powder, and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to fuse powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • In some examples, a method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam can comprise: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first RIP; coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and two or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the two or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber. The first RIP can be the same as the second RIP.
  • It is to be understood that both the foregoing general description and the following detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only, and are not restrictive of the present teachings, as claimed.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The above and/or other aspects and advantages will become more apparent and more readily appreciated from the following detailed description of examples, taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an example fiber structure for providing a laser beam having variable beam characteristics;
  • FIG. 2 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example fiber structure for delivering a beam with variable beam characteristics;
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example method of perturbing a fiber structure for providing a beam having variable beam characteristics;
  • FIG. 4 is a graph illustrating the calculated spatial profile of the lowest-order mode (LP01) for a first length of a fiber for different fiber bend radii;
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a two-dimensional intensity distribution at a junction when a fiber for varying beam characteristics is nearly straight;
  • FIG. 6 illustrates an example of a two-dimensional intensity distribution at a junction when a fiber for varying beam characteristics is bent with a radius chosen to preferentially excite a particular confinement region of a second length of fiber;
  • FIGS. 7-10 depict experimental results to illustrate further output beams for various bend radii of a fiber for varying beam characteristics shown in FIG. 2;
  • FIGS. 11-16 illustrate cross-sectional views of example first lengths of fiber for enabling adjustment of beam characteristics in a fiber assembly;
  • FIGS. 17-19 illustrate cross-sectional views of example second lengths of fiber (“confinement fibers”) for confining adjusted beam characteristics in a fiber assembly;
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate cross-sectional views of example second lengths of fiber for changing a divergence angle of and confining an adjusted beam in a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics;
  • FIG. 22A illustrates an example laser system including a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics disposed between a feeding fiber and process head;
  • FIG. 22B illustrates an example laser system including a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics disposed between a feeding fiber and process head;
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example laser system including a fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics disposed between a feeding fiber and multiple process fibers;
  • FIG. 24 illustrates examples of various perturbation assemblies for providing variable beam characteristics according to various examples provided herein;
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example process for adjusting and maintaining modified characteristics of an optical beam;
  • FIGS. 26-28 are cross-sectional views illustrating example second lengths of fiber (“confinement fibers”) for confining adjusted beam characteristics in a fiber assembly;
  • FIG. 29 depicts a first example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam;
  • FIG. 30 depicts a second example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam;
  • FIG. 31 depicts a plan view of a build layer having first and second regions;
  • FIG. 32 depicts an elevation view of a 3D object manufactured using a powder bed process;
  • FIG. 33 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a first point during the powder bed process;
  • FIG. 34 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a second point during the powder bed process;
  • FIG. 35 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a third point during the powder bed process;
  • FIG. 36 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a fourth point during the powder bed process;
  • FIG. 37 depicts a plan view of a portion of a 3D object after fusing;
  • FIG. 38A depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing; and
  • FIG. 38B depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing and further processing.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Exemplary aspects will now be described more fully with reference to the accompanying drawings. Examples of the disclosure, however, can be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as being limited to the examples set forth herein. Rather, these examples are provided so that this disclosure will be thorough and complete, and will fully convey the scope to one of ordinary skill in the art. In the drawings, some details may be simplified and/or may be drawn to facilitate understanding rather than to maintain strict structural accuracy, detail, and/or scale. For example, the thicknesses of layers and regions may be exaggerated for clarity.
  • It will be understood that when an element is referred to as being “on,” “connected to,” “electrically connected to,” or “coupled to” to another component, it may be directly on, connected to, electrically connected to, or coupled to the other component or intervening components may be present. In contrast, when a component is referred to as being “directly on,” “directly connected to,” “directly electrically connected to,” or “directly coupled to” another component, there are no intervening components present. As used herein, the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items.
  • It will be understood that although the terms first, second, third, etc., may be used herein to describe various elements, components, regions, layers, and/or sections, these elements, components, regions, layers, and/or sections should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element, component, region, layer, and/or section from another element, component, region, layer, and/or section. For example, a first element, component, region, layer, or section could be termed a second element, component, region, layer, or section without departing from the teachings of examples.
  • Spatially relative terms, such as “beneath,” “below,” “lower,” “above,” “upper,” and the like may be used herein for ease of description to describe the relationship of one component and/or feature to another component and/or feature, or other component(s) and/or feature(s), as illustrated in the drawings. It will be understood that the spatially relative terms are intended to encompass different orientations of the device in use or operation in addition to the orientation(s) depicted in the figures.
  • The terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular examples only and is not intended to be limiting of examples. As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” and/or “including,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.
  • Although the operations of some of the disclosed methods are described in a particular, sequential order for convenient presentation, it should be understood that this manner of description encompasses rearrangement, unless a particular ordering is required by specific language set forth below. For example, operations described sequentially may in some cases be rearranged or performed concurrently. Moreover, for the sake of simplicity, the attached figures may not show the various ways in which the disclosed systems, methods, and apparatuses can be used in conjunction with other systems, methods, and apparatuses. Additionally, the description sometimes uses terms like “produce” and “provide” to describe the disclosed methods. These terms are high-level abstractions of the actual operations that are performed. The actual operations that correspond to these terms will vary depending on the particular implementation and are readily discernible by a person of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Unless otherwise defined, all terms (including technical and scientific terms) used herein have the same meaning as understood by one of ordinary skill in the art. It will be further understood that terms, such as those defined in commonly used dictionaries, should be interpreted as having a meaning that is consistent with their meaning in the context of the relevant art and should not be interpreted in an idealized or overly formal sense unless expressly so defined herein.
  • The present disclosure is directed to methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics.
  • Definitions
  • Definitions of words and terms as used herein:
  • 1. The term “beam characteristics” refers to one or more of the following terms used to describe an optical beam. In general, the beam characteristics of most interest depend on the specifics of the application or optical system.
  • 2. The term “beam diameter” is defined as the distance across the center of the beam along an axis for which the irradiance (intensity) equals 1/e2 of the maximum irradiance (as understood by a person having ordinary skill in the art (“PHOSITA”)), other measures of beam diameter include, for example, full width at half maximum (“FWHM”) and second moment width/distance between 4σ values (“D4σ”)). While examples disclosed herein generally use beams that propagate in azimuthally symmetric modes, elliptical or other beam shapes can be used, and beam diameter can be different along different axes. Circular beams are characterized by a single beam diameter. Other beam shapes can have different beam diameters along different axes.
  • 3. The term “spot size” is the radial distance (radius) from the center point of maximum irradiance to the 1/e2 point (or equivalent for other measures of beam diameter—see definition of “beam diameter” above).
  • 4. The term “beam divergence distribution” is the distribution of enclosed power within a given propagation angle (e.g., full power vs. full cone angle). This quantity is sometimes called the “angular distribution” or “NA distribution.”
  • 5. The term “beam parameter product” (“BPP”) of a laser beam is defined as the product of the beam radius (measured at the beam waist) and the beam divergence half-angle (measured in the far field). The units of BPP are typically millimeters-milliradians (“mm-mrad”).
  • 6. A “confinement fiber” is defined to be a fiber that possesses one or more confinement regions, wherein a confinement region comprises a higher-index region (core region) surrounded by a lower-index region (cladding region). The RIP of a confinement fiber may include one or more higher-index regions (core regions) surrounded by lower-index regions (cladding regions), wherein light is guided in the higher-index regions. Each confinement region and each cladding region can have any RIP, including but not limited to step-index and graded-index. The confinement regions may or may not be concentric and may be a variety of shapes such as circular, annular, polygonal, arcuate, elliptical, irregular, or the like, or any combination thereof. The confinement regions in a particular confinement fiber may all have the same shape or may be different shapes. Moreover, confinement regions may be co-axial or may have offset axes with respect to one another. Confinement regions may be of uniform thickness about a central axis in the longitudinal direction, or the thicknesses may vary about the central axis in the longitudinal direction.
  • 7. The term “intensity distribution” refers to optical intensity as a function of position along a line (one-dimensional (“1D”) profile) or on a plane (two-dimensional (“2D”) profile). The line or plane is usually taken perpendicular to the propagation direction of the light. It is a quantitative property.
  • 8. “Luminance” is a photometric measure of the luminous intensity per unit area of light travelling in a given direction.
  • 9. “M2 factor” (also called “beam quality factor” or “beam propagation factor”) is a dimensionless parameter for quantifying the beam quality of laser beams, with M2=1 being a diffraction-limited beam, and larger values of the M2 factor corresponding to lower beam quality. M2 is equal to the BPP divided by λ/π, where λ is the wavelength of the beam in microns (if BPP is expressed in units of mm-mrad).
  • 10. The term “numerical aperture” or “NA” of an optical system is a dimensionless number that characterizes the range of angles over which the system can accept or emit light.
  • 11. The term “optical intensity” is not an official (SI) unit, but is used to denote incident power per unit area on a surface or passing through a plane.
  • 12. The term “power density” refers to optical power per unit area, although this is also referred to as “optical intensity.”
  • 13. The term “radial beam position” refers to the position of a beam in a fiber measured with respect to the center of the fiber core in a direction perpendicular to the fiber axis.
  • 14. “Radiance” is the radiation emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction by a unit area of an optical source (e.g., a laser). Radiance may be altered by changing the beam intensity distribution and/or beam divergence profile or distribution. The ability to vary the radiance profile of a laser beam implies the ability to vary the BPP.
  • 15. The term “refractive-index profile” or “RIP” refers to the refractive index as a function of position along a line (1D) or in a plane (2D) perpendicular to the fiber axis. Many fibers are azimuthally symmetric, in which case the 1D RIP is identical for any azimuthal angle.
  • 16. A “step-index fiber” has a RIP that is flat (refractive index independent of position) within the fiber core.
  • 17. A “graded-index fiber” has a RIP in which the refractive index decreases with increasing radial position (i.e., with increasing distance from the center of the fiber core).
  • 18. A “parabolic-index fiber” is a specific case of a graded-index fiber in which the refractive index decreases quadratically with increasing distance from the center of the fiber core.
  • 19. The term “additive manufacturing” refers to processes of joining materials to make parts from three-dimensional (“3D”) model data, usually layer upon layer, as opposed to subtractive manufacturing and formative manufacturing methodologies. Powder bed fusion, for example, is one common additive material process.
  • 20. The term “kerf width” refers to the width of material that is removed during operations that remove material (e.g., cutting).
  • 21. The term “build rate” refers to the time required to fuse a unit volume of, for example, powder or wire.
  • 22. The terms “fuse” and “fusing” refer to sintering, melting (e.g., partially or fully melting), chemical bonding, or any other phenomena in which particles are joined together using heat (e.g., coalescing of two or more materials due to application of heat).
  • Fiber for Varying Beam Characteristics
  • Disclosed herein are methods, systems, and apparatus configured to provide a fiber operable to provide a laser beam having variable beam characteristics (“VBC”) that may reduce cost, complexity, optical loss, or other drawbacks of the conventional methods described above. This VBC fiber is configured to vary a wide variety of optical beam characteristics. Such beam characteristics can be controlled using the VBC fiber thus allowing users to tune various beam characteristics to suit the particular requirements of an extensive variety of laser processing applications. For example, a VBC fiber may be used to tune: beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, intensity distribution, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity, power density, radial beam position, radiance, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • In general, the disclosed technology entails coupling a laser beam into a fiber in which the characteristics of the laser beam in the fiber can be adjusted by perturbing the laser beam and/or perturbing a first length of fiber by any of a variety of methods (e.g., bending the fiber or introducing one or more other perturbations) and fully or partially maintaining adjusted beam characteristics in a second length of fiber. The second length of fiber is specially configured to maintain and/or further modify the adjusted beam characteristics. In some cases, the second length of fiber preserves the adjusted beam characteristics through delivery of the laser beam to its ultimate use (e.g., materials processing). The first and second lengths of fiber may comprise the same or different fibers.
  • The disclosed technology is compatible with fiber-coupled lasers (e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, YAG lasers). Fiber-coupled lasers typically deliver an output via a delivery fiber having a step-index refractive index profile (“RIP”), i.e., a flat or constant refractive index within the fiber core. In reality, the RIP of the delivery fiber may not be perfectly flat, depending on the design of the fiber. Important parameters are the fiber core diameter (“dcore”) and NA. The core diameter is typically in the range of 10-1000 microns (although other values are possible), and the NA is typically in the range of 0.06-0.22 (although other values are possible). A delivery fiber from the laser may be routed directly to the process head or work piece, or it may be routed to a fiber-to-fiber coupler (“FFC”) or fiber-to-fiber switch (“FFS”), which couples the light from the delivery fiber into a process fiber that transmits the beam to the process head or the work piece.
  • Most materials processing tools, especially those at high power (>1 kilowatt (“kW”)), employ multimode (“MM”) fiber, but some employ single-mode (“SM”) fiber, which is at the lower end of the dcore and NA ranges. The beam characteristics from a SM fiber are uniquely determined by the fiber parameters. The beam characteristics from a MM fiber, however, can vary (unit-to-unit and/or as a function of laser power and time), depending on the beam characteristics from the laser source(s) coupled into the fiber, the launching or splicing conditions into the fiber, the fiber RIP, and the static and dynamic geometry of the fiber (bending, coiling, motion, micro-bending, etc.). For both SM and MM delivery fibers, the beam characteristics may not be optimum for a given materials processing task, and it is unlikely to be optimum for a range of tasks, motivating the desire to be able to systematically vary the beam characteristics in order to customize or optimize them for a particular processing task.
  • In one example, the VBC fiber may have a first length and a second length and may be configured to be interposed as an in-fiber device between the delivery fiber and the process head to provide the desired adjustability of the beam characteristics. To enable adjustment of the beam, a perturbation device and/or assembly is disposed in close proximity to and/or coupled with the VBC fiber and is responsible for perturbing the beam in a first length such that the beam's characteristics are altered in the first length of fiber, and the altered characteristics are preserved or further altered as the beam propagates in the second length of fiber. The perturbed beam is launched into a second length of the VBC fiber configured to conserve adjusted beam characteristics. The first and second lengths of fiber may be the same or different fibers and/or the second length of fiber may comprise a confinement fiber. The beam characteristics that are conserved by the second length of VBC fiber may include any of: angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an example VBC fiber 100 for providing a laser beam having variable beam characteristics without requiring the use of free-space optics to change the beam characteristics. VBC fiber 100 comprises a first length of fiber 104 and a second length of fiber 108. First length of fiber 104 and second length of fiber 108 may be the same or different fibers and may have the same or different RIPs. The first length of fiber 104 and the second length of fiber 108 may be joined together by a splice. First length of fiber 104 and second length of fiber 108 may be coupled in other ways, may be spaced apart, or may be connected via an interposing component such as another length of fiber, free-space optics, glue, index-matching material, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • A perturbation device 110 is disposed proximal to and/or envelops perturbation region 106. Perturbation device 110 may be a device, assembly, in-fiber structure, and/or other feature. Perturbation device 110 at least perturbs optical beam 102 in first length of fiber 104 or second length of fiber 108 or a combination thereof in order to adjust one or more beam characteristics of optical beam 102. Adjustment of optical beam 102 responsive to perturbation by perturbation device 110 may occur in first length of fiber 104 or second length of fiber 108 or a combination thereof. Perturbation region 106 may extend over various widths and may or may not extend into a portion of second length of fiber 108. As optical beam 102 propagates in VBC fiber 100, perturbation device 110 may physically act on VBC fiber 100 to perturb the fiber and adjust the characteristics of optical beam 102. Alternatively, perturbation device 110 may act directly on optical beam 102 to alter its beam characteristics. Subsequent to being adjusted, perturbed beam 112 has different beam characteristics than optical beam 102, which will be fully or partially conserved in second length of fiber 108. In another example, perturbation device 110 need not be disposed near a splice. Moreover, a splice may not be needed at all, for example VBC fiber 100 may be a single fiber, first length of fiber and second length of fiber could be spaced apart, or secured with a small gap (air-spaced or filled with an optical material, such as optical cement or an index-matching material).
  • Perturbed beam 112 is launched into second length of fiber 108, where perturbed beam 112 characteristics are largely maintained or continue to evolve as perturbed beam 112 propagates yielding the adjusted beam characteristics at the output of second length of fiber 108. In one example, the new beam characteristics may include an adjusted intensity distribution. In an example, an altered beam intensity distribution will be conserved in various structurally bounded confinement regions of second length of fiber 108. Thus, the beam intensity distribution may be tuned to a desired beam intensity distribution optimized for a particular laser processing task. In general, the intensity distribution of perturbed beam 112 will evolve as it propagates in the second length of fiber 108 to fill the confinement region(s) into which perturbed beam 112 is launched responsive to conditions in first length of fiber 104 and perturbation caused by perturbation device 110. In addition, the angular distribution may evolve as the beam propagates in the second fiber, depending on launch conditions and fiber characteristics. In general, fibers largely preserve the input divergence distribution, but the distribution can be broadened if the input divergence distribution is narrow and/or if the fiber has irregularities or deliberate features that perturb the divergence distribution. The various confinement regions, perturbations, and fiber features of second length of fiber 108 are described in greater detail below. Optical beam 102 and perturbed beam 112 are conceptual abstractions intended to illustrate how a beam may propagate through a VBC fiber 100 for providing variable beam characteristics and are not intended to closely model the behavior of a particular optical beam.
  • VBC fiber 100 may be manufactured by a variety of methods including Plasma Chemical Vapor Deposition (“PCVD”), Outside Vapor Deposition (“OVD”), Vapor Axial Deposition (“VAD”), Metal-Organic Chemical Vapor Deposition (“MOCVD”), and/or Direct Nanoparticle Deposition (“DND”). VBC fiber 100 may comprise a variety of materials. For example, VBC fiber 100 may comprise SiO2, SiO2 doped with GeO2, germanosilicate, phosphorus pentoxide, phosphosilicate, Al2O3, aluminosilicate, or the like, or any combination thereof. Confinement regions may be bounded by cladding doped with fluorine, boron, or the like, or any combination thereof. Other dopants may be added to active fibers, including rare-earth ions such as Er3+ (erbium), Yb3+ (ytterbium), Nd3+ (neodymium), Tm3+ (thulium), Ho3+ (holmium), or the like, or any combination thereof. Confinement regions may be bounded by cladding having a lower index than the confinement region with fluorine or boron doping. Alternatively, VBC fiber 100 may comprise photonic crystal fibers or micro-structured fibers.
  • VBC fiber 100 is suitable for use in any of a variety of fiber, fiber optic, or fiber laser devices, including continuous wave and pulsed fiber lasers, disk lasers, solid state lasers, or diode lasers (pulse rate unlimited except by physical constraints). Furthermore, implementations in a planar waveguide or other types of waveguides and not just fibers are within the scope of the claimed technology.
  • FIG. 2 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example VBC fiber 200 for adjusting beam characteristics of an optical beam. In an example, VBC fiber 200 may be a process fiber because it may deliver the beam to a process head for material processing. VBC fiber 200 comprises a first length of fiber 204 spliced at splice junction 206 to a second length of fiber 208. A perturbation assembly 210 is disposed proximal to splice junction 206. Perturbation assembly 210 may be any of a variety of devices configured to enable adjustment of the beam characteristics of an optical beam 202 propagating in VBC fiber 200. In an example, perturbation assembly 210 may be a mandrel and/or another device that may provide means of varying the bend radius and/or bend length of VBC fiber 200 near the splice. Other examples of perturbation devices are discussed below with respect to FIG. 24.
  • In an example, first length of fiber 204 has a parabolic-index first RIP 212 as indicated by the left RIP graph. Most of the intensity distribution of optical beam 202 is concentrated in the center of first length of fiber 204 when first length of fiber 204 is straight or nearly straight. Second length of fiber 208 is a confinement fiber having a second RIP 214 as shown in the right RIP graph. Second length of fiber 208 includes confinement regions 216, 218, and 220. Confinement region 216 is a central core surrounded by two annular (or ring-shaped) confinement regions 218 and 220. Layers 222 and 224 are structural barriers of lower index material between confinement regions 216, 218 and/or 220, commonly referred to as “cladding” regions. In one example, layers 222 and 224 may comprise rings of fluorosilicate; in some embodiments, the fluorosilicate cladding layers are relatively thin. Other materials may be used as well and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • In an example, as optical beam 202 propagates along VBC fiber 200, perturbation assembly 210 may physically act on second length of fiber 208 and/or optical beam 202 to adjust its beam characteristics and generate adjusted beam 226. In the current example, the intensity distribution of optical beam 202 is modified by perturbation assembly 210. Subsequent to adjustment of optical beam 202, the intensity distribution of adjusted beam 226 may be concentrated in outer confinement regions 218 and 220 with relatively little intensity in the central core confinement region 216. Because each of confinement regions 216, 218, and/or 220 is isolated by the thin layers of lower index material in barrier layers 222 and 224, second length of fiber 208 can substantially maintain the adjusted intensity distribution of adjusted beam 226. The beam will typically become distributed azimuthally within a given confinement region but will not transition (significantly) between the confinement regions as it propagates along the second length of fiber 208. Thus, the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 226 are largely conserved within the isolated confinement regions 216, 218, and/or 220. In some cases, it be may desirable to have the adjusted beam 226 power divided among the confinement regions 216, 218, and/or 220 rather than concentrated in a single region, and this condition may be achieved by generating an appropriately adjusted beam 226.
  • In one example, central core confinement region 216 and annular confinement regions 218 and 220 may be composed of fused silica glass, and cladding 222 and 224 defining the confinement regions may be composed of fluorosilicate glass. Other materials may be used to form the various confinement regions 216, 218, and/or 220, including germanosilicate, phosphosilicate, aluminosilicate, or the like, or a combination thereof, and claimed subject matter is not so limited. Other materials may be used to form the barrier rings 222 and/or 224, including fused silica, borosilicate, or the like, or a combination thereof, and claimed subject matter is not so limited. In other embodiments, the optical fibers or waveguides include or are composed of various polymers, plastics, or crystalline materials. Generally, the core confinement regions have refractive indices that are greater than the refractive indices of adjacent barrier/cladding regions.
  • In some examples, it may be desirable to increase a number of confinement regions in a second length of fiber to increase granularity of beam control over beam displacements for fine-tuning a beam profile. For example, confinement regions may be configured to provide stepwise beam displacement.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example method of perturbing VBC fiber 200 for providing variable beam characteristics of an optical beam. Changing the bend radius of a fiber may change the radial beam position, divergence angle, and/or radiance profile of a beam within the fiber. The bend radius of VBC fiber 200 can be decreased from a first bend radius RI to a second bend radius R2 about splice junction 206 by using a stepped mandrel or cone as the perturbation assembly 210. Additionally or alternatively, the engagement length on the mandrel(s) or cone can be varied. Rollers 250 may be employed to engage VBC fiber 200 across perturbation assembly 210. In an example, an amount of engagement of rollers 250 with VBC fiber 200 has been shown to shift the distribution of the intensity profile to the outer confinement regions 218 and 220 of VBC fiber 200 with a fixed mandrel radius. There are a variety of other methods for varying the bend radius of VBC fiber 200, such as using a clamping assembly, flexible tubing, or the like, or a combination thereof, and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard. In another example, for a particular bend radius the length over which VBC fiber 200 is bent can also vary beam characteristics in a controlled and reproducible way. In examples, changing the bend radius and/or length over which the fiber is bent at a particular bend radius also modifies the intensity distribution of the beam such that one or more modes may be shifted radially away from the center of a fiber core.
  • Maintaining the bend radius of the fibers across splice junction 206 ensures that the adjusted beam characteristics such as radial beam position and radiance profile of optical beam 202 will not return to optical beam 202's unperturbed state before being launched into second length of fiber 208. Moreover, the adjusted radial beam characteristics, including position, divergence angle, and/or intensity distribution, of adjusted beam 226 can be varied based on an extent of decrease in the bend radius and/or the extent of the bend length of VBC fiber 200. Thus, specific beam characteristics may be obtained using this method.
  • In the current example, first length of fiber 204 having first RIP 212 is spliced at splice junction 206 to a second length of fiber 208 having the second RIP 214. However, it is possible to use a single fiber having a single RIP formed to enable perturbation (e.g., by micro-bending) of the beam characteristics of optical beam 202 and also to enable conservation of the adjusted beam. Such a RIP may be similar to the RIPs shown in fibers illustrated in FIGS. 17, 18, and/or 19.
  • FIGS. 7-10 provide experimental results for VBC fiber 200 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) and illustrate further a beam response to perturbation of VBC fiber 200 when a perturbation assembly 210 acts on VBC fiber 200 to bend the fiber. FIGS. 4-6 are simulations and FIGS. 7-10 are experimental results wherein a beam from a SM 1050 nanometer (“nm”) source was launched into an input fiber (not shown) with a 40 micron (“μm”) core diameter. The input fiber was spliced to first length of fiber 204.
  • FIG. 4 is an example graph 400 illustrating the calculated profile of the lowest-order mode (LP01) for a first length of fiber 204 for different fiber bend radii 402, wherein a perturbation assembly 210 involves bending VBC fiber 200. As the fiber bend radius is decreased, an optical beam propagating in VBC fiber 200 is adjusted such that the mode shifts radially away from the center 404 of a VBC fiber 200 core (r=0 micron or μm) toward the core/cladding interface (located at r=100 microns in this example). Higher-order modes (LRIn) also shift with bending. Thus, a straight or nearly straight fiber (very large bend radius), curve 406 for LP01 is centered at or near the center of VBC fiber 200. At a bend radius of about 6 centimeters (“cm”), curve 408 for LP01 is shifted to a radial position of about 40 μm from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200. At a bend radius of about 5 cm, curve 410 for LP01 is shifted to a radial position about 50 μm from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200. At a bend radius of about 4 cm, curve 412 for LP01 is shifted to a radial position about 60 μm from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200. At a bend radius of about 3 cm, curve 414 for LP01 is shifted to a radial position about 80 μm from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200. At a bend radius of about 2.5 cm, a curve 416 for LP01 is shifted to a radial position about 85 μm from the center 404 of VBC fiber 200. Note that the shape of the mode remains relatively constant (until it approaches the edge of the core), which is a specific property of a parabolic RIP. Although, this property may be desirable in some situations, it is not required for the VBC functionality, and other RIPs may be employed.
  • In an example, if VBC fiber 200 is straightened, LP01 mode will shift back toward the center of the fiber. Thus, the purpose of second length of fiber 208 is to “trap” or confine the adjusted intensity distribution of the beam in a confinement region that is displaced from the center of the VBC fiber 200. The splice between first length of fiber 204 and second length of fiber 208 is included in the bent region, thus the shifted mode profile will be preferentially launched into one of the ring-shaped confinement regions 218 and 220 or be distributed among the confinement regions. FIGS. 5 and 6 illustrate this effect.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates an example two-dimensional intensity distribution at splice junction 206 within second length of fiber 208 when VBC fiber 200 is nearly straight. A significant portion of LP01 and LPIn are within confinement region 216 of second length of fiber 208. FIG. 6 illustrates the two-dimensional intensity distribution at splice junction 206 within second length of fiber 208 when VBC fiber 200 is bent with a radius chosen to preferentially excite confinement region 220 (the outermost confinement region) of second length of fiber 208. A significant portion of LP01 and LPIn are within confinement region 220 of second length of fiber 208.
  • In an example, second length of fiber 208 confinement region 216 has a 100 micron diameter, confinement region 218 is between 120 micron and 200 micron in diameter, and confinement region 220 is between 220 micron and 300 micron diameter. Confinement regions 216, 218, and 220 are separated by 10 um thick rings of fluorosilicate, providing an NA of 0.22 for the confinement regions. Other inner and outer diameters for the confinement regions, thicknesses of the rings separating the confinement regions, NA values for the confinement regions, and numbers of confinement regions may be employed.
  • Referring again to FIG. 5, with the noted parameters, when VBC fiber 200 is straight about 90% of the power is contained within the central confinement region 216, and about 100% of the power is contained within confinement regions 216 and 218. Referring now to FIG. 6, when VBC fiber 200 is bent to preferentially excite second ring confinement region 220, nearly 75% of the power is contained within confinement region 220, and more than 95% of the power is contained within confinement regions 218 and 220. These calculations include LP01, and two higher-order modes, which is typical in some 2-4 kW fiber lasers.
  • It is clear from FIGS. 5 and 6 that in the case where a perturbation assembly 210 acts on VBC fiber 200 to bend the fiber, the bend radius determines the spatial overlap of the modal intensity distribution of the first length of fiber 204 with the different guiding confinement regions 216, 218, and/or 220 of the second length of fiber 208. Changing the bend radius can thus change the intensity distribution at the output of the second length of fiber 208, thereby changing the beam diameter or spot size of the beam, and thus also changing its radiance and BPP value. This adjustment of the beam diameter or spot size may be accomplished in an all-fiber structure, involving no free-space optics and consequently may reduce or eliminate the disadvantages of free-space optics discussed above. Such adjustments can also be made with other perturbation assemblies that alter bend radius, bend length, fiber tension, temperature, or other perturbations discussed below.
  • In a typical materials processing system (e.g., a cutting or welding tool), the output of the process fiber is imaged at or near the work piece by the process head. Varying the intensity distribution as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 thus enables variation of the beam profile at the work piece in order to tune and/or optimize the process, as desired. Specific RIPs for the two fibers were assumed for the purpose of the above calculations, but other RIPs are possible, and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • FIGS. 7-10 depict experimental results (measured intensity distributions) to illustrate further output beams for various bend radii of VBC fiber 200 shown in FIG. 2.
  • In FIG. 7 when VBC fiber 200 is straight, the beam is nearly completely confined to confinement region 216. As the bend radius is decreased, the intensity distribution shifts to higher diameters (FIGS. 8-10). FIG. 8 depicts the intensity distribution when the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 is chosen to shift the intensity distribution preferentially to confinement region 218. FIG. 9 depicts the experimental results when the bend radius is further reduced and chosen to shift the intensity distribution outward to confinement region 220 and confinement region 218. In FIG. 10, at the smallest bend radius, the beam is nearly a “donut mode,” with most of the intensity in the outermost confinement region 220.
  • Despite excitation of the confinement regions from one side at the splice junction 206, the intensity distributions are nearly symmetric azimuthally because of scrambling within confinement regions as the beam propagates within the VBC fiber 200. Although the beam will typically scramble azimuthally as it propagates, various structures or perturbations (e.g., coils) could be included to facilitate this process.
  • For the fiber parameters used in the experiment shown in FIGS. 7-10, particular confinement regions were not exclusively excited because some intensity was present in multiple confinement regions. This feature may enable advantageous materials processing applications that are optimized by having a flatter or distributed beam intensity distribution. In applications requiring cleaner excitation of a given confinement region, different fiber RIPs could be employed to enable this feature.
  • The results shown in FIGS. 7-10 pertain to the particular fibers used in this experiment, and the details will vary depending on the specifics of the implementation. In particular, the spatial profile and divergence distribution of the output beam and their dependence on bend radius will depend on the specific RIPs employed, on the splice parameters, and on the characteristics of the laser source launched into the first fiber.
  • Different fiber parameters than those shown in FIG. 2 may be used and still be within the scope of the claimed subject matter. Specifically, different RIPs and core sizes and shapes may be used to facilitate compatibility with different input beam profiles and to enable different output beam characteristics. Example RIPs for the first length of fiber, in addition to the parabolic-index profile shown in FIG. 2, include other graded-index profiles, step-index, pedestal designs (i.e., nested cores with progressively lower refractive indices with increasing distance from the center of the fiber), and designs with nested cores with the same refractive index value but with various NA values for the central core and the surrounding rings. Example RIPs for the second length of fiber, in addition to the profile shown in FIG. 2, include confinement fibers with different numbers of confinement regions, non-uniform confinement-region thicknesses, different and/or non-uniform values for the thicknesses of the rings surrounding the confinement regions, different and/or non-uniform NA values for the confinement regions, different refractive-index values for the high-index and low-index portions of the RIP, non-circular confinement regions (such as elliptical, oval, polygonal, square, rectangular, or combinations thereof), as well as other designs as discussed in further detail with respect to FIGS. 26-28. Furthermore, VBC fiber 200 and other examples of a VBC fiber described herein are not restricted to use of two fibers. In some examples, implementation may include use of one fiber or more than two fibers. In some cases, the fiber(s) may not be axially uniform; for example, they could include fiber Bragg gratings or long-period gratings, or the diameter could vary along the length of the fiber. In addition, the fibers do not have to be azimuthally symmetric (e.g., the core(s) could have square or polygonal shapes). Various fiber coatings (buffers) may be employed, including high-index or index-matched coatings (which strip light at the glass-polymer interface) and low-index coatings (which guide light by total internal reflection at the glass-polymer interface). In some examples, multiple fiber coatings may be used on VBC fiber 200.
  • FIGS. 11-16 illustrate cross-sectional views of examples of first lengths of fiber for enabling adjustment of beam characteristics in a VBC fiber responsive to perturbation of an optical beam propagating in the first lengths of fiber. Some examples of beam characteristics that may be adjusted in the first length of fiber are: angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof. The first lengths of fiber depicted in FIGS. 11-16 and described below are merely examples and do not provide an exhaustive recitation of the variety of first lengths of fiber that may be utilized to enable adjustment of beam characteristics in a VBC fiber assembly. Selection of materials, appropriate RIPs, and other variables for the first lengths of fiber illustrated in FIGS. 11-16 at least depend on a desired beam output. A wide variety of fiber variables are contemplated and are within the scope of the claimed subject matter. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited by examples provided herein.
  • In FIG. 11 first length of fiber 1100 comprises a step-index profile 1102. FIG. 12 illustrates a first length of fiber 1200 comprising a “pedestal RIP” (i.e., a core comprising a step-index region surrounded by a larger step-index region) 1202. FIG. 13 illustrates first length of fiber 1300 comprising a multiple-pedestal RIP 1302.
  • FIG. 14A illustrates first length of fiber 1400 comprising a graded-index profile 1418 surrounded by a down-doped region 1404. When first length of fiber 1400 is perturbed, modes may shift radially outward in first length of fiber 1400 (e.g., during bending of first length of fiber 1400). Graded-index profile 1402 may be designed to promote maintenance or even compression of modal shape. This design may promote adjustment of a beam propagating in first length of fiber 1400 to generate a beam having a beam intensity distribution concentrated in an outer perimeter of the fiber (i.e., in a portion of the fiber core that is displaced from the fiber axis). As described above, when the adjusted beam is coupled into a second length of fiber having confinement regions, the intensity distribution of the adjusted beam may be trapped in the outermost confinement region, providing a donut shaped intensity distribution. A beam spot having a narrow outer confinement region may be useful to enable certain material processing actions.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates first length of fiber 1406 comprising a graded-index profile 1414 surrounded by a down-doped region 1408 similar to first length of fiber 1400. However, first length of fiber 1406 includes a divergence structure 1410 (a lower-index region) as can be seen in profile 1412. The divergence structure 1410 is an area of material with a lower refractive index than that of the surrounding core. As the beam is launched into first length of fiber 1406, refraction from divergence structure 1410 causes the beam divergence to increase in first length of fiber 1406. The amount of increased divergence depends on the amount of spatial overlap of the beam with the divergence structure 1410 and the magnitude of the index difference between the divergence structure 1410 and the core material. Divergence structure 1410 can have a variety of shapes, depending on the input divergence distribution and desired output divergence distribution. In an example, divergence structure 1410 has a triangular or graded index shape.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a first length of fiber 1500 comprising a parabolic-index central region 1508 surrounded by a constant-index region 1502, and the constant-index region 1502 is surrounded by a lower-index annular layer 1506 and another constant-index region 1504. The lower-index annular layer 1506 helps guide a beam propagating in first length of fiber 1500. When the propagating beam is perturbed, modes shift radially outward in first length of fiber 1500 (e.g., during bending of first length of fiber 1500). As one or more modes shift radially outward, parabolic-index central region 1508 promotes retention of modal shape. When the modes reach the constant-index region of the RIP 1510, they will be compressed against the lower-index annular layer 1506, which may cause preferential excitation of the outermost confinement region in the second fiber (in comparison to the first fiber RIP shown in FIG. 14). In one implementation, this fiber design works with a confinement fiber having a central step-index core and a single annular core. The parabolic-index central region 1508 of the RIP overlaps with the central step-index core of the confinement fiber. The constant-index region 1502 overlaps with the annular core of the confinement fiber. The constant-index region 1502 of the first fiber is intended to make it easier to move the beam into overlap with the annular core by bending. This fiber design also works with other designs of the confinement fiber.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a first length of fiber 1600, having RIP 1602, comprising guiding regions 1604, 1606, 1608, and 1616 bounded by lower- index layers 1610, 1612, and 1614 where the indexes of the lower- index layers 1610, 1612, and 1614 are stepped or, more generally, do not all have the same value. The stepped-index layers may serve to bound the beam intensity to certain guiding regions 1604, 1606, 1608, and/or 1616 when the perturbation assembly 210 (see FIG. 2) acts on the first length of fiber 1600. In this way, adjusted beam light may be trapped in the guiding regions over a range of perturbation actions (such as over a range of bend radii, a range of bend lengths, a range of micro-bending pressures, and/or a range of acousto-optical signals), allowing for a certain degree of perturbation tolerance before a beam intensity distribution is shifted to a more distant radial position in first length of fiber 1600. Thus, variation in beam characteristics may be controlled in a step-wise fashion. The radial widths of the guiding regions 1604, 1606, 1608, and 1616 may be adjusted to achieve a desired ring width, as may be required by an application. Also, a guiding region can have a thicker radial width to facilitate trapping of a larger fraction of the incoming beam profile if desired. Guiding region 1606 is an example of such a design.
  • FIGS. 17-21 depict examples of fibers configured to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics in the second length of fiber (e.g., second length of fiber 208). These fiber designs are referred to as “ring-shaped confinement fibers” because they contain a central core surrounded by annular or ring-shaped cores. These designs are merely examples and not an exhaustive recitation of the variety of fiber RIPs that may be used to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics within a fiber. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited to the examples provided herein. Moreover, any of the first lengths of fiber described above with respect to FIGS. 11-16 may be combined with any of the second length of fiber described FIGS. 17-21.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber for maintaining and/or confining adjusted beam characteristics in a VBC fiber assembly. As the perturbed beam is coupled from a first length of fiber to second length of fiber 1700, the second length of fiber 1700 may maintain at least a portion of the beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber within one or more of confinement regions 1704, 1706, and/or 1708. Second length of fiber 1700 has a RIP 1702. Each of confinement regions 1704, 1706, and/or 1708 is bounded by a lower index layer 1710 and/or 1712. This design enables second length of fiber 1700 to maintain the adjusted beam characteristics. As a result, a beam output by second length of fiber 1700 will substantially maintain the received adjusted beam as modified in the first length of fiber giving the output beam adjusted beam characteristics, which may be customized to a processing task or other application.
  • Similarly, FIG. 18 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 1800 for maintaining and/or confining beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber in a VBC fiber assembly. Second length of fiber 1800 has a RIP 1802. However, confinement regions 1808, 1810, and/or 1812 have different thicknesses than confinement regions 1704, 1706, and 1708. Each of confinement regions 1808, 1810, and/or 1812 is bounded by a lower index layer 1804 and/or 1806. Varying the thicknesses of the confinement regions (and/or barrier regions) enables tailoring or optimization of a confined adjusted radiance profile by selecting particular radial positions within which to confine an adjusted beam.
  • FIG. 19 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 1900 having a RIP 1902 for maintaining and/or confining an adjusted beam in a VBC fiber assembly configured to provide variable beam characteristics. In this example, the number and thicknesses of confinement regions 1904, 1906, 1908, and 1910 are different from second lengths of fiber 1700 and 1800 and the barrier layers 1912, 1914, and 1916 are of varied thicknesses as well. Furthermore, confinement regions 1904, 1906, 1908, and 1910 have different indexes of refraction and barrier layers 1912, 1914, and 1916 have different indexes of refraction as well. This design may further enable a more granular or optimized tailoring of the confinement and/or maintenance of an adjusted beam radiance to particular radial locations within second length of fiber 1900. As the perturbed beam is launched from a first length of fiber to second length of fiber 1900 the modified beam characteristics of the beam (having an adjusted intensity distribution, radial position, and/or divergence angle, or the like, or a combination thereof) is confined within a specific radius by one or more of confinement regions 1904, 1906, 1908, and/or 1910 of second length of fiber 1900.
  • As noted previously, the divergence angle of a beam may be conserved or adjusted and then conserved in the second length of fiber. There are a variety of methods to change the divergence angle of a beam. The following are examples of fibers configured to enable adjustment of the divergence angle of a beam propagating from a first length of fiber to a second length of fiber in a fiber assembly for varying beam characteristics. However, these are merely examples and not an exhaustive recitation of the variety of methods that may be used to enable adjustment of divergence of a beam. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited to the examples provided herein.
  • FIG. 20 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 2000 having RIP 2002 for modifying, maintaining, and/or confining beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber. In this example, second length of fiber 2000 is similar to the previously described second lengths of fiber and forms a portion of the VBC fiber assembly for delivering variable beam characteristics as discussed above. There are three confinement regions 2004, 2006, and 2008 and three barrier layers 2010, 2012, and 2016. Second length of fiber 2000 also has a divergence structure 2014 situated within the confinement region 2006. The divergence structure 2014 is an area of material with a lower refractive index than that of the surrounding confinement region. As the beam is launched into second length of fiber 2000, refraction from divergence structure 2014 causes the beam divergence to increase in second length of fiber 2000. The amount of increased divergence depends on the amount of spatial overlap of the beam with the divergence structure 2014 and the magnitude of the index difference between the divergence structure 2014 and the core material. By adjusting the radial position of the beam near the launch point into the second length of fiber 2000, the divergence distribution may be varied, The adjusted divergence of the beam is conserved in second length of fiber 2000, which is configured to deliver the adjusted beam to the process head, another optical system (e.g., fiber-to-fiber coupler or fiber-to-fiber switch), the work piece, or the like, or any combination thereof. In an example, divergence structure 2014 may have an index dip of about 10−53×10−2 with respect to the surrounding material. Other values of the index dip may be employed within the scope of this disclosure and claimed subject matter is not so limited.
  • FIG. 21 depicts a cross-sectional view of an example second length of fiber 2100 having a RIP 2102 for modifying, maintaining, and/or confining beam characteristics adjusted in response to perturbation in the first length of fiber. Second length of fiber 2100 forms a portion of a VBC fiber assembly for delivering a beam having variable characteristics. In this example, there are three confinement regions 2104, 2106, and 2108 and three barrier layers 2110, 2112, and 2116. Second length of fiber 2100 also has a plurality of divergence structures 2114 and 2118. The divergence structures 2114 and 2118 are areas of graded lower index material. As the beam is launched from the first length fiber into second length of fiber 2100, refraction from divergence structures 2114 and 2118 causes the beam divergence to increase. The amount of increased divergence depends on the amount of spatial overlap of the beam with the divergence structure and the magnitude of the index difference between the divergence structure 2114 and/or 2118 and the surrounding core material of confinement regions 2106 and 2104 respectively. By adjusting the radial position of the beam near the launch point into the second length of fiber 2100, the divergence distribution may be varied. The design shown in FIG. 21 allows the intensity distribution and the divergence distribution to be varied somewhat independently by selecting both a particular confinement region and the divergence distribution within that conferment region (because each confinement region may include a divergence structure). The adjusted divergence of the beam is conserved in second length of fiber 2100, which is configured to deliver the adjusted beam to the process head, another optical system, or the work piece. Forming the divergence structures 2114 and 2118 with a graded or non-constant index enables tuning of the divergence profile of the beam propagating in second length of fiber 2100. An adjusted beam characteristic such as a radiance profile and/or divergence profile may be conserved as it is delivered to a process head by the second fiber. Alternatively, an adjusted beam characteristic such as a radiance profile and/or divergence profile may be conserved or further adjusted as it is routed by the second fiber through a fiber-to-fiber coupler (“FFC”) and/or fiber-to-fiber switch (“FFS”) and to a process fiber, which delivers the beam to the process head or the work piece.
  • FIGS. 26-28 are cross-sectional views illustrating examples of fibers and fiber RIPs configured to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics of a beam propagating in an azimuthally asymmetric second length of fiber wherein the beam characteristics are adjusted responsive to perturbation of a first length of fiber coupled to the second length of fiber and/or perturbation of the beam by a perturbation device 110. These azimuthally asymmetric designs are merely examples and are not an exhaustive recitation of the variety of fiber RIPs that may be used to enable maintenance and/or confinement of adjusted beam characteristics within an azimuthally asymmetric fiber. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited to the examples provided herein. Moreover, any of a variety of first lengths of fiber (e.g., like those described above) may be combined with any azimuthally asymmetric second length of fiber (e.g., like those described in FIGS. 26-28).
  • FIG. 26 illustrates RIPs at various azimuthal angles of a cross-section through an elliptical fiber 2600. At a first azimuthal angle 2602, elliptical fiber 2600 has a first RIP 2604. At a second azimuthal angle 2606 that is rotated 45° from first azimuthal angle 2602, elliptical fiber 2600 has a second RIP 2608. At a third azimuthal angle 2610 that is rotated another 45° from second azimuthal angle 2606, elliptical fiber 2600 has a third RIP 2612. First, second, and third RIPs 2604, 2608, and 2612 are all different.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates RIPs at various azimuthal angles of a cross-section through a multicore fiber 2700. At a first azimuthal angle 2702, multicore fiber 2700 has a first RIP 2704. At a second azimuthal angle 2706, multicore fiber 2700 has a second RIP 2708. First and second RIPs 2704 and 2708 are different. In an example, perturbation device 110 may act in multiple planes in order to launch the adjusted beam into different regions of an azimuthally asymmetric second fiber.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates RIPs at various azimuthal angles of a cross-section through a fiber 2800 having at least one crescent shaped core. In some cases, the corners of the crescent may be rounded, flattened, or otherwise shaped, which may minimize optical loss. At a first azimuthal angle 2802, fiber 2800 has a first RIP 2804. At a second azimuthal angle 2806, fiber 2800 has a second RIP 2808. First and second RIPs 2804 and 2808 are different.
  • FIG. 22A illustrates an example of a laser system 2200 including a VBC fiber assembly 2202 configured to provide variable beam characteristics. VBC fiber assembly 2202 comprises a first length of fiber 104, second length of fiber 108, and a perturbation device 110. VBC fiber assembly 2202 is disposed between feeding fiber 2212 (i.e., the output fiber from the laser source) and VBC delivery fiber 2240. VBC delivery fiber 2240 may comprise second length of fiber 108 or an extension of second length of fiber 108 that modifies, maintains, and/or confines adjusted beam characteristics. Beam 2210 is coupled into VBC fiber assembly 2202 via feeding fiber 2212. VBC Fiber assembly 2202 is configured to vary the characteristics of beam 2210 in accordance with the various examples described above. The output of VBC fiber assembly 2202 is adjusted beam 2214 which is coupled into VBC delivery fiber 2240. VBC delivery fiber 2240 delivers adjusted beam 2214 to free-space optics assembly 2208, which then couples adjusted beam 2214 into a process fiber 2204. Adjusted beam 2214 is then delivered to process head 2206 by process fiber 2204. The process head can include guided wave optics (such as fibers and fiber coupler), free space optics such as lenses, mirrors, optical filters, diffraction gratings), beam scan assemblies such as galvanometer scanners, polygonal mirror scanners, or other scanning systems that are used to shape the adjusted beam 2214 and deliver the shaped beam to a workpiece.
  • In laser system 2200, one or more of the free-space optics of free-space optics assembly 2208 may be disposed in an FFC or other beam coupler 2216 to perform a variety of optical manipulations of an adjusted beam 2214 (represented in FIG. 22A with different dashing than beam 2210). For example, free-space optics assembly 2208 may preserve the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2214. Process fiber 2204 may have the same RIP as VBC delivery fiber 2240. Thus, the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2214 may be preserved all the way to process head 2206. Process fiber 2204 may comprise a RIP similar to any of the second lengths of fiber described above, including confinement regions.
  • Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 228, free-space optics assembly 2208 may change the adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2214 by, for example, increasing or decreasing the divergence, the beam diameter, and/or the spot size of adjusted beam 2214 (e.g., by magnifying or demagnifying adjusted beam 2214) and/or otherwise further modifying adjusted beam 2214. Furthermore, process fiber 2204 may have a different RIP than VBC delivery fiber 2240. Accordingly, the RIP of process fiber 2204 may be selected to preserve additional adjustment of adjusted beam 2214 made by the free-space optics of free-space optics assembly 2208 to generate a twice adjusted beam 2224 (represented in FIG. 22B with different dashing than adjusted beam 2214).
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a laser system 2300 including VBC fiber assembly 2302 disposed between feeding fiber 2312 and VBC delivery fiber 2340. During operation, beam 2310 is coupled into VBC fiber assembly 2302 via feeding fiber 2312. VBC Fiber assembly 2302 includes a first length of fiber 104, second length of fiber 108, and a perturbation device 110 and is configured to vary characteristics of beam 2310 in accordance with the various examples described above. VBC Fiber assembly 2302 generates adjusted beam 2314 output by VBC delivery fiber 2340. VBC delivery fiber 2340 comprises a second length of fiber 108 of fiber for modifying, maintaining, and/or confining adjusted beam characteristics in a VBC fiber assembly 2302 in accordance with the various examples described above (see FIGS. 17-21, for example). VBC delivery fiber 2340 couples adjusted beam 2314 into beam switch (“FFS”) 2332, which then couples its various output beams to one or more of multiple process fibers 2304, 2320, and 2322. Process fibers 2304, 2320, and 2322 deliver adjusted beams 2314, 2328, and 2330 to respective process heads 2306, 2324, and 2326.
  • In an example, beam switch 2332 includes one or more sets of free- space optics 2308, 2316, and 2318 configured to perform a variety of optical manipulations of adjusted beam 2314. Free- space optics 2308, 2316, and 2318 may preserve or vary adjusted beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2314. Thus, adjusted beam 2314 may be maintained by the free-space optics or adjusted further. Process fibers 2304, 2320, and 2322 may have the same or a different RIP as VBC delivery fiber 2340, depending on whether it is desirable to preserve or further modify a beam passing from the free- space optics assemblies 2308, 2316, and 2318 to respective process fibers 2304, 2320, and 2322. In other examples, one or more beam portions of beam 2310 are coupled to a workpiece without adjustment, or different beam portions are coupled to respective VBC fiber assemblies so that beam portions associated with a plurality of beam characteristics can be provided for simultaneous workpiece processing. Alternatively, beam 2310 can be switched to one or more of a set of VBC fiber assemblies.
  • Routing adjusted beam 2314 through any of free- space optics assemblies 2308, 2316, and 2318 enables delivery of a variety of additionally adjusted beams to process heads 2306, 2324, and 2326. Therefore, laser system 2300 provides additional degrees of freedom for varying the characteristics of a beam, as well as switching the beam between process heads (“time sharing”) and/or delivering the beam to multiple process heads simultaneously (“power sharing”).
  • For example, free-space optics in beam switch 2332 may direct adjusted beam 2314 to free-space optics 2316 configured to preserve the adjusted characteristics of adjusted beam 2314. Process fiber 2304 may have the same RIP as VBC delivery fiber 2340. Thus, the beam delivered to process head 2306 will be a preserved adjusted beam 2314.
  • In another example, beam switch 2332 may direct adjusted beam 2314 to free-space optics 2318 configured to preserve the adjusted characteristics of adjusted beam 2314. Process fiber 2320 may have a different RIP than VBC delivery fiber 2340 and may be configured with divergence altering structures as described with respect to FIGS. 20 and 21 to provide additional adjustments to the divergence distribution of adjusted beam 2314. Thus, the beam delivered to process head 2324 will be a twice adjusted beam 2328 having a different beam divergence profile than adjusted beam 2314.
  • Process fibers 2304, 2320, and/or 2322 may comprise a RIP similar to any of the second lengths of fiber described above, including confinement regions or a wide variety of other RIPs, and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • In yet another example, free-space optics beam switch 2332 may direct adjusted beam 2314 to free-space optics 2308 configured to change the beam characteristics of adjusted beam 2314. Process fiber 2322 may have a different RIP than VBC delivery fiber 2340 and may be configured to preserve (or alternatively further modify) the new further adjusted characteristics of adjusted beam 2314. Thus, the beam delivered to process head 2326 will be a twice adjusted beam 2330 having different beam characteristics (due to the adjusted divergence profile and/or intensity profile) than adjusted beam 2314.
  • In FIGS. 22A, 22B, and 23, the optics in the FFC or FFS may adjust the spatial profile and/or divergence profile by magnifying or demagnifying the adjusted beam 2214 before launching into the process fiber. They may also adjust the spatial profile and/or divergence profile via other optical transformations. They may also adjust the launch position into the process fiber. These methods may be used alone or in combination.
  • FIGS. 22A, 22B, and 23 merely provide examples of combinations of adjustments to beam characteristics using free-space optics and various combinations of fiber RIPs to preserve or modify adjusted beams 2214 and 2314. The examples provided above are not exhaustive and are meant for illustrative purposes only. Thus, claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates various examples of perturbation devices, assemblies, or methods (for simplicity referred to collectively herein as “perturbation device 110”) for perturbing a VBC fiber 200 and/or an optical beam propagating in VBC fiber 200 according to various examples provided herein. Perturbation device 110 may be any of a variety of devices, methods, and/or assemblies configured to enable adjustment of beam characteristics of a beam propagating in VBC fiber 200. In an example, perturbation device 110 may be a mandrel 2402, a micro-bend 2404 in the VBC fiber 200, flexible tubing 2406, an acousto-optic transducer 2408, a thermal device 2410, a piezoelectric device 2412 (e.g., transducer), a grating 2414, a clamp 2416 (or other fastener), a mandrel-roller combination 2432, or the like, or any combination thereof. These are merely examples of perturbation devices 110 and not an exhaustive listing of perturbation devices 110, and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Mandrel 2402 may be used to perturb VBC fiber 200 by providing a form about which VBC fiber 200 may be bent. As discussed above, reducing the bend radius of VBC fiber 200 moves the intensity distribution of the beam radially outward. In some examples, mandrel 2402 may be stepped or conically shaped to provide discrete bend radii levels. Alternatively, mandrel 2402 may comprise a cone shape without steps to provide continuous bend radii for more granular control of the bend radius. The radius of curvature of mandrel 2402 may be constant (e.g., a cylindrical form) or non-constant (e.g., an oval-shaped form). Similarly, flexible tubing 2406, clamps 2416 (or other varieties of fasteners), or rollers 250 may be used to guide and control the bending of VBC fiber 200 about mandrel 2402. Furthermore, changing the length over which the fiber is bent at a particular bend radius also may modify the intensity distribution of the beam. VBC fiber 200 and mandrel 2402 may be configured to change the intensity distribution within the first fiber predictably (e.g., in proportion to the length over which the fiber is bent and/or the bend radius). Rollers 250 may move up and down along a track 2442 on platform 2434 to change the bend radius of VBC fiber 200.
  • Clamps 2416 (or other fasteners) may be used to guide and control the bending of VBC fiber 200 with or without a mandrel 2402. Clamps 2416 may move up and down along a track 2442 or platform 2446. Clamps 2416 may also swivel to change bend radius, tension, or direction of VBC fiber 200. Controller 2448 may control the movement of clamps 2416.
  • In another example, perturbation device 110 may be flexible tubing 2406 and may guide bending of VBC fiber 200 with or without a mandrel 2402. Flexible tubing 2406 may encase VBC fiber 200. Flexible tubing 2406 may be made of a variety of materials and may be manipulated using piezoelectric transducers controlled by controller 2444. In another example, clamps or other fasteners may be used to move flexible tubing 2406.
  • Micro-bend 2404 in VBC fiber 200 is a local perturbation caused by lateral mechanical stress on the fiber. Micro-bending can cause mode coupling and/or transitions from one confinement region to another confinement region within a fiber, resulting in varied beam characteristics of the beam propagating in a VBC fiber 200. Mechanical stress may be applied by an actuator 2436 that is controlled by controller 2440. However, this is merely an example of a method for inducing mechanical stress in VBC fiber 200 and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Acousto-optic transducer (“AOT”) 2408 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in the VBC fiber 200 using an acoustic wave. The perturbation is caused by the modification of the refractive index of the fiber by the oscillating mechanical pressure of an acoustic wave. The period and strength of the acoustic wave are related to the acoustic wave frequency and amplitude, allowing dynamic control of the acoustic perturbation. Thus, a perturbation device 110 including AOT 2408 may be configured to vary the beam characteristics of a beam propagating in the fiber. In an example, piezoelectric transducer 2418 may create the acoustic wave and may be controlled by controller or driver 2420. The acoustic wave induced in AOT 2408 may be modulated to change and/or control the beam characteristics of the optical beam in VBC fiber 200 in real-time. However, this is merely an example of a method for creating and controlling an AOT 2408 and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Thermal device 2410 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in VBC fiber 200 using heat. The perturbation is caused by the modification of the RIP of the fiber induced by heat. Perturbation may be dynamically controlled by controlling an amount of heat transferred to the fiber and the length over which the heat is applied. Thus, a perturbation device 110 including thermal device 2410 may be configured to vary a range of beam characteristics. Thermal device 2410 may be controlled by controller 2450.
  • Piezoelectric device 2412 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in a VBC fiber using piezoelectric action. The perturbation is caused by the modification of the RIP of the fiber induced by a piezoelectric material attached to the fiber. The piezoelectric material in the form of a jacket around the bare fiber may apply tension or compression to the fiber, modifying its refractive index via the resulting changes in density. Perturbation may be dynamically controlled by controlling a voltage to the piezoelectric device 2412. Thus, a perturbation device 110 including piezoelectric device 2412 may be configured to vary the beam characteristics over a particular range.
  • In an example, piezoelectric device 2412 may be configured to displace VBC fiber 200 in a variety of directions (e.g., axially, radially, and/or laterally) depending on a variety of factors, including how the piezoelectric device 2412 is attached to VBC fiber 200, the direction of the polarization of the piezoelectric materials, the applied voltage, etc. Additionally, bending of VBC fiber 200 is possible using the piezoelectric device 2412. For example, driving a length of piezoelectric material having multiple segments comprising opposing electrodes can cause a piezoelectric device 2412 to bend in a lateral direction. Voltage applied to piezoelectric device 2412 by electrode 2424 may be controlled by controller 2422 to control displacement of VBC fiber 200. Displacement may be modulated to change and/or control the beam characteristics of the optical beam in VBC fiber 200 in real-time. However, this is merely an example of a method of controlling displacement of a VBC fiber 200 using a piezoelectric device 2412 and claimed subject matter is not limited in this regard.
  • Gratings 2414 may be used to induce perturbation of a beam propagating in a VBC fiber 200. A grating 2414 can be written into a fiber by inscribing a periodic variation of the refractive index into the core. Gratings 2414 such as fiber Bragg gratings can operate as optical filters or as reflectors. A long-period grating can induce transitions among co-propagating fiber modes. The radiance, intensity profile, and/or divergence profile of a beam comprised of one or more modes can thus be adjusted using a long-period grating to couple one or more of the original modes to one or more different modes having different radiance and/or divergence profiles. Adjustment is achieved by varying the periodicity or amplitude of the refractive index grating. Methods such as varying the temperature, bend radius, and/or length (e.g., stretching) of the fiber Bragg grating can be used for such adjustment. VBC fiber 200 having gratings 2414 may be coupled to stage 2426. Stage 2426 may be configured to execute any of a variety of functions and may be controlled by controller 2428. For example, stage 2426 may be coupled to VBC fiber 200 with fasteners 2430 and may be configured to stretch and/or bend VBC fiber 200 using fasteners 2430 for leverage. Stage 2426 may have an embedded thermal device and may change the temperature of VBC fiber 200.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example process 2500 for adjusting and/or maintaining beam characteristics within a fiber without the use of free-space optics to adjust the beam characteristics. In block 2502, a first length of fiber and/or an optical beam are perturbed to adjust one or more optical beam characteristics. Process 2500 moves to block 2504, where the optical beam is launched into a second length of fiber. Process 2500 moves to block 2506, where the optical beam having the adjusted beam characteristics is propagated in the second length of fiber. Process 2500 moves to block 2508, where at least a portion of the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam are maintained within one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber. The first and second lengths of fiber may be comprised of the same fiber, or they may be different fibers.
  • Systems for Processing Using Adjustable Beam Characteristics
  • A system for processing can comprise, for example, VBC fiber 100, including first length of fiber 104 and second length of fiber 108, and perturbation device 110 in order to control one or more beam characteristics of optical beam 102, per FIG. 1. Such a system for processing can comprise, for example, VBC fiber 200, including first length of fiber 204 and second length of fiber 208, and perturbation device 210 in order to control one or more beam characteristics of optical beam 202, per FIG. 2.
  • Such a system for processing can comprise, for example, first length of fiber 1100, per FIG. 11; first length of fiber 2100, per FIG. 12; first length of fiber 1300, per FIG. 13; first length of fiber 1400, per FIG. 14A; first length of fiber 1406, per FIG. 14B; first length of fiber 1500, per FIG. 15; or first length of fiber 1600, per FIG. 16.
  • Such a system for processing can comprise, for example, second length of fiber 1700, per FIG. 17; second length of fiber 1800, per FIG. 18; second length of fiber 1900, per FIG. 19; second length of fiber 2000, per FIG. 20; or second length of fiber 2100, per FIG. 21.
  • In some examples, a first length of fiber, a second length of fiber, and a perturbation device can be combined in a fiber assembly, such as VBC fiber assembly 2202, per FIG. 22A or FIG. 22B; or VBC fiber assembly 2302, per FIG. 23.
  • A perturbation device (e.g., perturbation device 110) can be configured to modify one or more beam characteristics of optical beam (e.g., optical beam 102), during processing, in the first length of fiber (e.g., first length of fiber 104), in the second length of fiber (e.g., second length of fiber 108), or in the first and second lengths of fiber.
  • In some examples, the perturbation device (e.g., perturbation device 110) can modify one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam (e.g., optical beam 102). The modified one or more beam characteristics can include, for example, one or more of angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, divergence distribution, BPP, intensity distribution, luminance, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, or spot size, or any combination thereof.
  • In some examples, the perturbing effectuated by the perturbation device (e.g., perturbation device 110) can include one or more of bending, bending over a particular length, micro-bending, applying acousto-optic excitation, thermal perturbation, stretching, applying piezoelectric perturbation, applying clamps (or other fasteners), using a grating, or any combination thereof. FIG. 24 illustrates various examples of such perturbation devices.
  • Such a system for processing can further comprise, for example, one or more optical beam sources configured to generate optical beams, such as laser beams associated with fiber-coupled lasers (e.g., disk lasers, diode lasers, fiber lasers, YAG lasers), per FIGS. 22A, 22B, and/or 23.
  • Such a system for processing can further comprise, for example, one or more beam couplers, beam switches, free-space optics assemblies, process heads, or any combination thereof. In some examples, characteristics of an adjusted beam (e.g., adjusted beam 2214) from a VBC fiber assembly (e.g., VBC fiber assembly 2202) can be preserved in a delivery fiber (e.g., VBC delivery fiber 2240), free-space optics assembly (e.g., free-space optics assembly 2208), process fiber (e.g., process fiber 2204), and/or process head (process head 2206), per FIG. 22A. In some examples, characteristics of an adjusted beam (e.g., adjusted beam 2214) from a VBC fiber assembly (e.g., VBC fiber assembly 2202) can be preserved in a delivery fiber (e.g., VBC delivery fiber 2240), but then further modified in a free-space optics assembly (e.g., free-space optics assembly 2208), and then the twice-adjusted beam can be preserved in a process fiber (e.g., process fiber 2204) and/or process head (process head 2206), per FIG. 228. In some examples, characteristics of an adjusted beam (e.g., adjusted beam 2314) from a VBC fiber assembly (e.g., VBC fiber assembly 2302) can be preserved in a delivery fiber (e.g., VBC delivery fiber 2340), but then switched using a beam switch (e.g., beam switch 2332) and preserved or further modified in one or more free-space optics assemblies (e.g., free- space optics assemblies 2308, 2316, 2318), and then the once-or-twice-adjusted beams can be preserved in one or more process fibers (e.g., process fiber 2304, 2320, 2322) and/or one or more process heads (e.g., process head 2306, 2324, 2326), per FIG. 23. Such a system provides for options such as power sharing and time sharing as discussed.
  • Methods of Processing Using Adjustable Beam Characteristics
  • FIG. 29 depicts a first example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam. In some examples, the processing can include additive processing and/or manufacture of a product. In some examples, the processing can include one or more of ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding, or any combination thereof.
  • In block 2902, the optical beam is launched into a first length of fiber having a first RIP. In block 2904, one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber. Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 2904), in the second length of fiber (block 2908), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 2904 and 2908).
  • In block 2906, the optical beam is coupled from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and one or more confinement regions. In some examples, when the second length of fiber has one confinement region, the first RIP can differ from the second RIP; but when the second length of fiber has two or more confinement regions, the first RIP can be the same as or differ from the second RIP.
  • In block 2908, the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the second length of fiber. Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, azimuthal intensity distribution. In some examples, the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 2904), in the second length of fiber (block 2908), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 2904 and 2908).
  • In block 2910, the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam are confined within the one or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber. In block 2912, an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, is generated from the second length of fiber.
  • Similarly, FIG. 30 depicts a second example method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam. In some examples, the processing can include additive processing and/or manufacture of a product. In some examples, the process can include one or more of ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding, or any combination thereof.
  • In block 3002, the optical beam is launched into a first length of fiber having a first RIP. In block 3004, one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber. Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 3004), in the second length of fiber (block 3008), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 3004 and 3008).
  • In block 3006, the optical beam is coupled from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and two or more confinement regions. In some examples, the first RIP can be the same as or differ from the second RIP.
  • In block 3008, the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the second length of fiber. Such modified beam characteristics can include, for example, azimuthal intensity distribution. In some examples, the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified in the first length of fiber (block 3004), in the second length of fiber (block 3008), or in the first and second lengths of fiber (blocks 3004 and 3008).
  • In block 3010, the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam are confined within the two or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber. In block 3012, an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, is generated from the second length of fiber.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an angular distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the angular distribution can be adjusted to increase or decrease the divergence, to change the axis of symmetry, to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical, or to change the ratio of asymmetry.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an azimuthal intensity distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the azimuthal intensity distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical, or to change the ratio of asymmetry.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam diameter of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the beam diameter can be greater than or equal to 1 μm and less than or equal to 1,000 μm; greater than or equal to 1 μm and less than or equal to 100 μm (e.g., for additive manufacturing); greater than or equal to 100 μm and less than or equal to 500 μm (e.g., for welding); or greater than or equal to 500 μm and less than or equal to 1,000 μm (e.g., for cladding).
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam divergence distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the beam divergence distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a BPP of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the BPP can be greater than or equal to 1 mm-mrad and less than or equal to 50 mm-mrad; greater than or equal to 1 mm-mrad and less than or equal to 10 mm-mrad; or greater than or equal to 10 mm-mrad and less than or equal to 50 mm-mrad.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top) of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the beam profile can be adjusted to make it Gaussian or more Gaussian, flat-topped or more flat-topped, ring/donut shaped, or an azimuthally non-symmetric power distribution profile.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a beam shape of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the beam shape can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a divergence of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the divergence can be greater than or equal to 10 mrad and less than or equal to 500 mrad; greater than or equal to 10 mrad and less than or equal to 200 mrad (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); greater than or equal to 50 mrad and less than or equal to 200 mrad (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); or greater than or equal to 50 mrad and less than or equal to 500 mrad (e.g., glass- or polymer-guided optical beam).
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a divergence profile of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the divergence profile can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an intensity distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the intensity distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a luminance of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an M2 factor of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the M2 factor can be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 100; greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 10; greater than or equal to 3 and less than or equal to 30; greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 20; or greater than or equal to 5 and less than or equal to 100.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an NA of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the NA can be greater than or equal to 0.01 and less than or equal to 0.50; greater than or equal to 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.25; greater than or equal to 0.01 and less than or equal to 0.20 (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); greater than or equal to 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.20 (e.g., glass-guided optical beam); or greater than or equal to 0.05 and less than or equal to 0.50 (e.g., glass- or polymer-guided optical beam).
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an optical intensity profile of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving. glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the optical intensity profile can be adjusted to make to shift intensity toward or away from a center of the output beam.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting an optical mode (e.g., filtering) of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the optical mode can be adjusted to filter out higher order modes from the output beam, or to intentionally add higher order mode shapes.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: increasing power density of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, marking, patterning, roughening, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. In some examples, the method can further comprise: decreasing power density of the output beam for cutting, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, smoothing, surface texturing, and/or trepanning one or more parts of the product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a radial beam position of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the radial beam position can be closer to a center of a process fiber or farther from the center of the process fiber.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a radiance of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: adjusting a spatial profile distribution of the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. For example, the spatial profile distribution can be adjusted to make it symmetrical or asymmetrical.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: increasing beam diameter and/or spot size of the output beam for heat-treating and/or smoothing one or more parts of a product. A larger beam diameter and/or spot size can optimize build rate by covering more area during a given period of time, while a smaller beam diameter and/or spot size can improve the quality of an edge or surface qualities of a product being manufactured. Such improvements can drastically enhance build rate and/or feature resolution of the product.
  • The spot shape can vary, depending on intended use. For example, the spot shape can be round, elliptical, donut shaped, or any combination thereof (e.g., a round portion in the center surrounded by a donut shape). For example, the spot shape can be azimuthally symmetric or azimuthally asymmetric.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a plan view of a build layer 3100 having a first region 3102 and a second region 3104. A scan direction 3106 provides an example path of an optical beam as it travels across the build layer 3100. While only a single pass of the optical beam is illustrated, multiple passes can be made across all or a portion of the build layer 3100, as desired, using almost any combination of scan directions to yield virtually any desired scan pattern. In addition, passes can be linear or non-linear, as desired. For optimum flexibility, one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during any given pass.
  • As the optical beam travels across the build layer 3100, it initially encounters first region 3102, in which it can be desired to optimize surface roughness. A smaller beam diameter and/or spot size can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator, to improve the quality of the surface finish in order to optimize surface roughness in first region 3102. As the optical beam continues across the build layer 3100, it encounters second region 3104, in which it can be desired to optimize build rate. A larger beam diameter and/or spot size can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator, to optimize build rate by covering more area during a given period of time in second region 3104. As the optical beam continues across the build layer 3100, it again encounters first region 3102, in which it can be desired to optimize surface roughness. Once again, a smaller beam diameter and/or spot size can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator, to improve the quality of the surface finish in order to optimize surface roughness in first region 3102.
  • At some point during the creation of a layer-based 3D object, every portion of the material for the 3D object is either exposed or lies immediately under the surface of a thinly deposited or processed layer, which is often referred to as a “build layer” in the additive manufacturing art. This level of access to the material for the 3D object of the build layer allows for additional processing by an optical (e.g., laser) beam.
  • Initially, a first layer of particles is positioned on a build plate. The particles can be free-flowing (e.g., a dry powder), in the form of a paste or wire (e.g., solid particles), or in any other form suitable for additive manufacturing. The particles can comprise metal materials, non-metal materials, or mixtures of both. Particles comprising metal materials can include any metals or metal-containing compounds, including alloys and mixtures of various metallic compounds (e.g., metal oxides, metal carbides, metal nitrides, etc.) that are suitable for additive manufacturing. Non-metals can include any non-metal materials suitable for additive manufacturing, such as, for example, ceramics, polymers, or waxes.
  • The first layer of particles is heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse the particles together to form a first build layer. The optical beam employed for exposing the first build layer is emitted from an optical fiber, such as from any of the lasers disclosed in this application. One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the exposing of the first build layer. As disclosed in this application, the modifying of the optical beam occurs prior to the optical beam being outputted from the optical fiber.
  • After forming the first build layer, a second layer of particles is positioned on the exposed first build layer. The second layer of particles is heated by the optical beam sufficiently to fuse the particles together to form a second build layer. The optical beam employed for exposing the second build layer is emitted from the optical fiber, such as from any of the lasers disclosed in this application. One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the exposing of the second build layer. As disclosed in this application, the modifying of the optical beam occurs prior to the optical beam being outputted from the optical fiber.
  • The positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles can be repeated as necessary to form the 3D object.
  • The modifying of the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber can be performed by any of the techniques disclosed in this application. For example, the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics can comprise modifying one or more of angular distribution, azimuthal intensity distribution, beam diameter, beam divergence distribution, BPP, beam profile (e.g., Gaussian, flat-top), beam shape, divergence, divergence profile, intensity distribution, luminance, M2 factor, NA, optical intensity profile, optical mode (e.g., filtering), power density profile, radial beam position, radiance, spatial profile distribution, spot shape, spot size, or the like, or any combination thereof.
  • In some examples, the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics is carried out without the use of free-space optics, as disclosed in this application. Without such free-space optics, the resulting ability to quickly modify the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can allow, for example, switching among beam shapes on the fly (e.g., without slowing or stopping a pass of the optical beam), thereby providing corresponding manufacturing efficiencies, and allowing efficient tailoring of temperature profiles and the resulting stress states in a 3D object being manufactured. For example, free-space optics can allow such modifications over times on the order of hundreds of milliseconds, whereas in-fiber solutions could allow such modifications over times on the order of hundreds of microseconds or single-digit milliseconds.
  • In some examples, more than one laser can be used for the method of processing (e.g., a first laser for pre-heating powder, a second laser for fusing powder, and/or a third laser for post-heating powder). In particular, more than one laser with a variable BPP system as disclosed in this application could provide enhanced performance (e.g., improved part quality, part utility, and/or production speed) and/or increased flexibility (e.g., in process, machine, or plant design and/or operation).
  • In some examples, more than one laser can be used for the method of processing (e.g., stopping at points while a 3D object is being built using a first laser, and using a second laser to anneal, normalize, solutionize, stress relieve, temper, etc. the 3D object). In this example, the second laser could emit a larger, uniform beam and, thus, would not require the variable BPP system as disclosed in this application.
  • In some examples, the ability to quickly modify the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, using a laser with a variable BPP system as disclosed in this application, would allow the same laser to be used for the entire method of processing, thereby providing corresponding manufacturing efficiencies.
  • FIG. 32 depicts an elevation view of a 3D object 3200 manufactured using a powder bed process.
  • In some examples, the powder bed process can use one or more layers, such as first layer 3202 a, second layer 3202 b, third layer 3202 c, fourth layer 3202 d, fifth layer 3202 e, sixth layer 3202 f, seventh layer 3202 g, eighth layer 3202 h, ninth layer 3202 i, tenth layer 3202 j, and eleventh layer 3202 k. However, any number of layers can be used. For example, the number of layers can be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 100,000; greater than or equal to 10 and less than or equal to 10,000; or be greater than or equal to 100 and less than or equal to 1,000.
  • Depending on the processing, the one or more layers (e.g., first layer 3202 a, second layer 3202 b, third layer 3202 c, fourth layer 3202 d, fifth layer 3202 e, sixth layer 3202 f, seventh layer 3202 g, eighth layer 3202 h, ninth layer 3202 i, tenth layer 3202 j, or eleventh layer 3202 k, or any combination thereof) can comprise powder that is the same in each layer, different in each layer, the same in two or more layers, different in two or more layers, the same in alternating layers, different in alternating layers, the same in bottom and top layers, etc.
  • When building a complex 3D object, such as 3D object 3200, supporting structures can be incorporated that stay in place until 3D object 3200 is completed (after which the supporting structures are removed). In some examples, the powder bed process can use one or more supporting structures, such as first supporting structures 3204 a, second supporting structures 3204 b, and third supporting structures 3204 c. However, any number of supporting structures can be used. For example, the number of supporting structures can be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 1,000,000, but the number of supporting structures could exceed 1,000,000.
  • As shown in FIG. 32, optical beam source 3206 can generate optical beam 3208 to selectively heat the one or more layers (e.g., first layer 3202 a, second layer 3202 b, third layer 3202 c, fourth layer 3202 d, fifth layer 3202 e, sixth layer 3202 f, seventh layer 3202 g, eighth layer 3202 h, ninth layer 3202 i, tenth layer 3202 j, or eleventh layer 3202 k, or any combination thereof) of powder sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form 3D object 3200, first supporting structures 3304 a, second supporting structures 3204 b, and/or third supporting structures 3204 c.
  • FIG. 33 depicts a plan view of the 3D object 3200 at a first point during the powder bed process. The 3D object 3200 starts with a layer of particles 3300 forming a powder bed positioned on a build plate (not shown) so as to be exposed. The layer of particles 3300 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3302 of 3D object 3200 and four first supporting structures 3304 a. One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3300 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • The remaining particles in the layer of particles 3300 of the powder bed remain unfused. The positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles is repeated, continuing to build the first portion 3302 of 3D object 3200 and the four first supporting structures 3304 a.
  • FIG. 34 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a second point during the powder bed process. A layer of particles 3400 is positioned on the previous layer so as to be exposed. The layer of particles 3400 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3402 of 3D object 3200, a second portion 3406 of 3D object 3200, four first supporting structures 3404 a, and four second supporting structures 3404 b. One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3400 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when the material underlying a layer of particles is unfused powder as opposed to when the material underlying the layer of particles is a solid of fused material; different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • The remaining particles in the layer of particles 3400 of the powder bed remain unfused. The positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles is repeated, continuing to build the first portion 3402 of 3D object 3200, the second portion 3406 of 3D object 3200, and the four second supporting structures 3404 b (the four first supporting structures 3404 a do not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3400).
  • FIG. 35 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a third point during the powder bed process. A layer of particles 3500 is positioned on the previous layer so as to be exposed. The layer of particles 3500 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3502 of 3D object 3200, a second portion 3506 of 3D object 3200, a third portion 3508 of 3D object 3200, four second supporting structures 3504 b, and four third supporting structures 3504 c (the four first supporting structures 3404 a did not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3400, but are shown for clarity). One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3500 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when the material underlying a layer of particles is unfused powder as opposed to when the material underlying the layer of particles is a solid of fused material; different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • The remaining particles in the layer of particles 3500 of the powder bed remain unfused. The positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles is repeated, continuing to build the first portion 3502 of 3D object 3200, the second portion 3506 of 3D object 3200, the third portion 3508 of 3D object 3200, and the four third supporting structures 3504 c (the four second supporting structures 3504 b do not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3500).
  • FIG. 36 depicts a plan view of a 3D object at a fourth point during the powder bed process. A layer of particles 3600 is positioned on the previous layer so as to be exposed. The layer of particles 3600 is selectively heated by an optical beam sufficiently to fuse some of the particles together to form a first portion 3602 of 3D object 3200, a second portion 3606 of 3D object 3200, a third portion 3608 of 3D object 3200, a fourth portion 3610 of 3D object 3200, and four third supporting structures 3604 c (the four first supporting structures 3404 a did not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3400 and the four second supporting structures 3504 b did not extend upward beyond the layer of particles 3500, but are shown for clarity). One or more beam characteristics of the optical beam can be modified prior to and/or during the selective heating of the layer of particles 3600 (different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when the material underlying a layer of particles is unfused powder as opposed to when the material underlying the layer of particles is a solid of fused material; different beam characteristics can be desired, for example, when forming a relatively permanent 3D object as opposed to a relatively temporary supporting structure).
  • The remaining particles in the layer of particles 3600 of the powder bed remain unfused. The positioning of another layer of particles and subsequent heating of the another layer of particles are not repeated, because 3D object 3200 is now complete.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: using the output beam for ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. The using of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • FIG. 37 depicts a plan view of a portion of a 3D object after fusing. Portion 3710 of 3D object 3200 can be a product for which further processing is desired or required. Such further processing can include, for example, one or more of ablating and/or engraving 3712; cutting 3714; drilling and/or trepanning 3716; heat-treating 3718; marking 3720; or engraving, patterning, roughening, and/or surface texturing 3722, or any combination thereof.
  • FIG. 38A depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing. 3D object 3200 can be a product for which further processing is desired or required. FIG. 38B depicts an elevation view of a 3D object after fusing and such further processing. The further processing can include, for example, one or more of glazing, smoothing, or a combination thereof. As deposited or as deposited and fused, 3D object 3200 can have portions 3824 a, 3824 b that include significant irregularities. As understood by a PHOSITA, one or more of glazing, smoothing, or a combination thereof can reduce the irregularities, for example, of portion 3824 b to that of portion 3824 c or similar.
  • During operations that remove material (e.g., ablating, cutting, drilling, engraving, trepanning), laser cutting speed (e.g., material feed rate) and/or laser output power can affect kerf width. Generally, kerf width increases for lower cutting speeds and higher laser powers.
  • Also, during operations that remove material (e.g., ablating, cutting, drilling, engraving, trepanning), high pressure assist gas can be used to prevent or limit oxidation reactions in the removal area, to evacuate melted material from the kerf, to add heat input to the process, or to remove heat from the process. The assist gas and/or the pressure of the assist gas can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator from one or more sources. The assist gas itself can include one or more of air, argon, helium, nitrogen, oxygen, other gases known to a person having ordinary skill in the art, or any combination thereof.
  • Depending on the processing, values of the assist gas pressure can range, for example, from less than 1 pound per square inch gage (“psig”) to more than 500 psig; greater than or equal to 1 psig and less than or equal to 10 psig; greater than or equal to 1 psig and less than or equal to 50 psig; or greater than or equal to 50 psig and less than or equal to 500 psig. The pressure can be constant during a given processing or can be changed at least once during the processing, such as when changing the assist gas, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of a scan pattern.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: modulating the output beam while ablating, cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, and/or welding one or more parts of a product. The modulating of the output beam can occur, for example, during and/or after manufacture of the product.
  • Modulating of the output beam can involve starting and stopping of generation of the output beam (e.g., effectively turning the output beam on and off). In some examples, the output beam can be generated as a series of pulses. A pulse indicates that the output beam is being generated (e.g., is on), and the absence of a pulse indicates that the output beam is not being generated (e.g., is off).
  • In some examples, the output beam can be modulated at a selected frequency (typically expressed in cycles/second or Hertz (“Hz”). The modulation frequency can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator from one or more discrete values or from a continuous range of values.
  • Depending on the processing, values of the modulation frequency can be, for example, greater than or equal to 1 Hz and less than or equal to 100,000 Hz (100 kHz); greater than or equal to 1 Hz and less than or equal to 500 Hz; greater than or equal to 500 Hz and less than or equal to 5,000 Hz (5 kHz); or greater than or equal to 5,000 Hz (5 kHz) and less than or equal to 100,000 Hz (100 kHz). The modulation frequency can be constant during a given processing or can be changed at least once during the processing, such as when modifying the one or more beam characteristics and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of a scan pattern.
  • In some examples, the output beam can be modulated at a selected duty cycle, where the duty cycle is the fraction of a period during which the output beam is on (typically expressed in percent). The duty cycle can influence heat input and/or the heating rate. The duty cycle can be selected, for example, automatically or by an operator from one or more discrete values or from a continuous range of values from 0% to 100%. Depending on the processing, values of the duty cycle can include, for example, 0% (always off); 10%; 20%; 25%; 30%; 40%; 50% (half on, half off); 60%; 70%; 75%; 80%; 90%; or 100% (always on). Values of the duty cycle also can include, for example, about 10%; about 20%; about 30%; about 40%; about 50%; about 60%; about 70%; about 80%; or about 90%. The duty cycle can be constant during a given processing or can be changed at least once during the processing.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to fuse the powder.
  • In additive processing, it can be desirable to pre-heat and/or post-heat the associated powder, as well as to fuse the powder. In contrast to standard commercial AM systems the pre-heating can raise the temperature of the associated powder in a powder bed and/or an associated substrate above 200° C. (e.g., for control of moisture), above 500° C. (e.g., for control of residual stresses), or above 1,000° C. (e.g., for control of microstructure evolution). Such pre-heating can improve, for example, crack mitigation, distortion control, and/or microstructure control. The higher temperatures generally correlate with the processing of metals, while the lower temperatures generally correlate with the processing of polymers.
  • In such processing, the output beam can be used to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and also used to fuse the powder. The output beam can be alternated back and forth between pre-heating the powder and fusing the powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • As discussed above, in additive processing, it can be desirable to pre-heat and/or post-heat the associated powder, as well as to fuse the powder. The pre-heating can raise the temperature of the associated powder in a powder bed and/or an associated substrate above 100° C., above 300° C. (e.g., lower temperature melt alloys), or above 600° C. (higher temperature melt alloys). As before, the higher temperatures generally correlate with the processing of metals, while the lower temperatures generally correlate with the processing of polymers.
  • In such processing, the output beam can be used to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and also used to post-heat the fused powder. The output beam can be alternated back and forth between pre-heating the powder and post-heating the fused powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • In such processing, the post-heating of the fused powder can help control the cooldown rate of the fused powder, improving ductility, reducing residual stresses, and reducing the propensity for cracking at least in portions of the fused powder. In contrast, a lack of post-heating effectively can quench the fused powder, increasing stress and improving hardness at least in portions of the fused powder. Thus, the manner and amount of post-heating can be tailored to influence and/or control properties of the fused powder, in particular by modifying the one or more beam characteristics to provide fine tuning of the post-heating effects.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to fuse powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • As discussed above, in additive processing, it can be desirable to pre-heat and/or post-heat the associated powder, as well as to fuse the powder. In such processing, the output beam can be used to fuse the powder, and also used to post-heat the fused powder. The output beam can be alternated back and forth between fusing the powder and post-heating the fused powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, alternately using the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, using the output beam to fuse the powder, and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • As discussed above, in additive processing, it can be desirable to pre-heat and/or post-heat the associated powder, as well as to fuse the powder. The pre-heating can raise the temperature of the associated powder in a powder bed and/or an associated substrate above 100° C., above 300° C. (e.g., lower temperature melt alloys), or above 600° C. (higher temperature melt alloys). As before, the higher temperatures generally correlate with the processing of metals, while the lower temperatures generally correlate with the processing of polymers.
  • In such processing, the output beam can be used to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, to fuse the powder, and also used to post-heat the fused powder. The output beam can be alternated between pre-heating the powder, fusing the powder, and post-heating the fused powder, being changed, for example, when modifying the one or more beam characteristics, during any individual pass of a scan pattern, and/or when starting or finishing any individual pass of the scan pattern.
  • In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder. In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to fuse powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder. In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder. In some examples, the method can further comprise: in additive processing, using a first portion of the output beam to pre-heat powder prior to fusing the powder, simultaneously using a second portion of the output beam to fuse the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
  • The variable BPP system as disclosed in this application can split the optical beam into two or more portions. For example, the variable BPP system can split the optical beam into a relatively small, higher power density central spot and a relatively large, lower power density ring surrounding the central spot. In this case, as the optical beam passes over a powder bed, the surrounding ring can pre-heat the powder bed, then the central spot can fuse the powder, and finally the surrounding ring can post-heat the fused powder.
  • In addition, the variable BPP system as disclosed in this application can split the optical beam into other examples of two or more portions, as would be understood by a person having ordinary skill in the art. These other examples provide various combinations of pre-heating the powder bed, fusing the powder, and/or post-heating the fused powder.
  • When splitting the optical beam into two or more portions, the modifying of the one or more beam characteristics includes modifying one or more beam characteristics of at least one of the two or more portions.
  • In some examples, a method of processing by controlling one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam can comprise: launching the optical beam into a first length of fiber having a first RIP; coupling the optical beam from the first length of fiber into a second length of fiber having a second RIP and two or more confinement regions; modifying the one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam in the first length of fiber, in the second length of fiber, or in the first and second lengths of fiber; confining the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam within the two or more confinement regions of the second length of fiber; and/or generating an output beam, having the modified one or more beam characteristics of the optical beam, from the second length of fiber. The first RIP can be the same as the second RIP.
  • Having described and illustrated the general and specific principles of examples of the presently disclosed technology, it should be apparent that the examples may be modified in arrangement and detail without departing from such principles. We claim all modifications and variation coming within the spirit and scope of the following claims.

Claims (21)

1-20. (canceled)
21. A method of fabricating an object, the method comprising:
processing a powder bed or work piece with a laser in which optical power is delivered from the laser to the powder bed or work piece via an optical fiber using beam characteristic variations carried out in-fiber without the use of free space optics, wherein the optical power is delivered from the laser using a scan pattern including a plurality of individual passes and the processing includes:
performing at least part of an individual pass of the plurality of individual passes using a first output beam emitted from the optical fiber;
after performing the at least part of the individual pass, modifying one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam launched into the optical fiber to generate a second output beam; and
performing a next part of the individual pass or at least part of a next individual pass of the plurality of individual passes using the second output beam.
22. The method of claim 21, further comprising using the first output beam to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder and using the second output beam to fuse the powder.
23. The method of claim 21, further comprising using the first output beam to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder and using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
24. The method of claim 21, further comprising using the first output beam to fuse powder of the powder bed and using the second output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
25. The method of claim 21, further comprising:
using the first output beam to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder;
using the second output beam to fuse the powder; and
using the second output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
26. The method of claim 21, further comprising:
using a first portion of one of the output beams to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using a second portion of the same output beam to fuse the powder.
27. The method of claim 21, further comprising:
using a first portion of one of the output beams to fuse powder of the powder bed, and simultaneously using a second portion of the same output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
28. The method of claim 21, further comprising:
using a first portion of one of the output beams to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder, and simultaneously using the first portion of the same output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
29. The method of claim 21, further comprising:
using a first portion of one of the output beams to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder;
simultaneously using a second portion of the same output beam to fuse the powder; and
simultaneously using the first portion of the same output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
30. The method of claim 21, wherein fabricating the object comprises using one of the output beams for one or more of cladding, cutting, drilling, engraving, glazing, heat-treating, marking, patterning, roughening, smoothing, surface texturing, trepanning, or welding, or combinations thereof, one or more parts of the object.
31. An apparatus to fabricate an object from a powder bed or work piece, the apparatus comprising:
a laser system in which optical power is delivered from the laser system to the powder bed or work piece via an optical fiber using beam characteristic variations carried out in-fiber, the laser system comprising:
a variable beam characteristic (VBC) fiber assembly to carry out the beam characteristics variations in-fiber, the VBC fiber assembly to generate, from an optical beam provided thereto, an adjusted beam having variable beam characteristics, without the use of free-space optics;
a free-space optics assembly coupled to an output of the VBC fiber assembly, the free-space optics assembly to perform one or more optical manipulations on the adjusted beam; and
a process head coupled to an output of the free-space optics assembly to receive the adjusted beam or an optical beam derived therefrom, the process head to deliver optical power from the laser system to the powder bed or workpiece using a scan pattern including a plurality of individual passes.
32. The apparatus of claim 31, wherein the one or more optical manipulations change the variable beam characteristics of the adjusted beam.
33. The apparatus of claim 32, wherein the one or more optical manipulations change a divergence, beam diameters, and/or spot size of the adjusted beam.
34. The apparatus of claim 31, wherein the one or more optical manipulations preserve the variable beam characteristics of the adjusted beam.
35. The apparatus of claim 31, wherein the VBC fiber assembly generates the adjusted beam differently for one of the individual passes than another one or the individual passes, or the VBC fiber assembly generates the adjusted beam differently for an initial part of the one of the individual passes than a subsequent part of the one of the individual passes.
36. An apparatus for fabricating an object, the apparatus comprising:
a laser system to process a powder bed or work piece with a laser in which optical power is delivered from the laser to the powder bed or work piece via an optical fiber using beam characteristic variations carried out in-fiber without the use of free space optics, wherein the optical power is delivered from the laser using a scan pattern including a plurality of individual passes and the laser system includes:
means for performing at least part of an individual pass of the plurality of individual passes using a first output beam emitted from the optical fiber;
means for modifying one or more beam characteristics of an optical beam launched into the optical fiber to generate a second output beam after performing the at least part of the individual pass; and
means for performing a next part of the individual pass or at least part of a next individual pass of the plurality of individual passes using the second output beam.
37. The apparatus of claim 36, further comprising means for using the first output beam to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder and means for using the second output beam to fuse the powder.
38. The apparatus of claim 36, further comprising means for using the first output beam to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder and means for using the output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
39. The apparatus of claim 36, further comprising means for using the first output beam to fuse powder of the powder bed and means for using the second output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
40. The apparatus of claim 36, further comprising:
means for using the first output beam to pre-heat powder of the powder bed prior to fusing the powder;
means for using the second output beam to fuse the powder; and
means for using the second output beam to post-heat the fused powder.
US17/127,746 2016-09-29 2020-12-18 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics Abandoned US20210286200A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/127,746 US20210286200A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-12-18 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics
US17/854,933 US11886053B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-06-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662401650P 2016-09-29 2016-09-29
US15/607,399 US10423015B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/607,410 US10663767B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/607,411 US10295845B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
PCT/US2017/034848 WO2018063452A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/883,480 US10877220B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-01-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics
US17/127,746 US20210286200A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-12-18 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/883,480 Continuation US10877220B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-01-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/854,933 Continuation US11886053B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-06-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20210286200A1 true US20210286200A1 (en) 2021-09-16

Family

ID=59054235

Family Applications (9)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/607,410 Active US10663767B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/607,411 Active US10295845B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/607,399 Active US10423015B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/883,480 Active 2037-10-21 US10877220B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-01-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics
US15/885,563 Active US10656330B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-01-31 Use of variable beam parameters to control solidification of a material
US16/402,147 Active US10732440B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-05-02 Adjustable beam characteristics
US16/921,531 Active US11886052B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-07-06 Adjustable beam characteristics
US17/127,746 Abandoned US20210286200A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-12-18 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics
US17/854,933 Active US11886053B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-06-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics

Family Applications Before (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/607,410 Active US10663767B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/607,411 Active US10295845B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/607,399 Active US10423015B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-05-26 Adjustable beam characteristics
US15/883,480 Active 2037-10-21 US10877220B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-01-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics
US15/885,563 Active US10656330B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-01-31 Use of variable beam parameters to control solidification of a material
US16/402,147 Active US10732440B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-05-02 Adjustable beam characteristics
US16/921,531 Active US11886052B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-07-06 Adjustable beam characteristics

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/854,933 Active US11886053B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-06-30 Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (9) US10663767B2 (en)
EP (14) EP3519871A1 (en)
JP (5) JP7186695B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102498030B1 (en)
CN (11) CN109791252B (en)
TW (1) TWI695196B (en)
WO (27) WO2018063452A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023048920A1 (en) * 2021-09-21 2023-03-30 Nlight, Inc. Acoustically controlled laser system

Families Citing this family (71)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6349410B2 (en) 2014-02-26 2018-06-27 ビエン チャン, System and method for multi-beam laser array with variable beam parameter product
US10069271B2 (en) 2014-06-02 2018-09-04 Nlight, Inc. Scalable high power fiber laser
US10618131B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2020-04-14 Nlight, Inc. Laser patterning skew correction
US9837783B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2017-12-05 Nlight, Inc. High-power, single-mode fiber sources
US10050404B2 (en) 2015-03-26 2018-08-14 Nlight, Inc. Fiber source with cascaded gain stages and/or multimode delivery fiber with low splice loss
US10768433B2 (en) 2015-09-24 2020-09-08 Nlight, Inc. Beam parameter product (bpp) control by varying fiber-to-fiber angle
EP3380266B1 (en) 2015-11-23 2021-08-11 NLIGHT, Inc. Fine-scale temporal control for laser material processing
US11179807B2 (en) 2015-11-23 2021-11-23 Nlight, Inc. Fine-scale temporal control for laser material processing
US10673199B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-based saturable absorber
US10730785B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-08-04 Nlight, Inc. Optical fiber bending mechanisms
US10673198B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-coupled laser with time varying beam characteristics
US10690928B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-23 Nlight, Inc. Methods of and systems for heat deposition in additive manufacturing
US10663742B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-26 Nlight, Inc. Method and system for cutting a material using a laser having adjustable beam characteristics
CN109791252B (en) 2016-09-29 2021-06-29 恩耐公司 Adjustable beam characteristics
US10673197B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-based optical modulator
CN108081605B (en) * 2016-11-22 2021-09-21 通用电气公司 Laser energy management device and method, and additive manufacturing system
US10656334B2 (en) 2016-11-22 2020-05-19 Lumentum Operations Llc Rotary optical beam generator
US11347069B2 (en) 2016-11-22 2022-05-31 Lumentum Operations Llc Rotary optical beam generator
US10429584B2 (en) 2016-11-22 2019-10-01 Lumentum Operations Llc Rotary optical beam generator
US10690855B2 (en) 2016-11-22 2020-06-23 Lumentum Operations Llc Tapered non-concentric core fibers
CN110651218B (en) 2017-04-04 2022-03-01 恩耐公司 Apparatus, system and method for calibration of galvanometer scanners
EP3431262A1 (en) * 2017-07-21 2019-01-23 CL Schutzrechtsverwaltungs GmbH Plant for additively manufacturing of three-dimensional objects
JP6674422B2 (en) * 2017-09-14 2020-04-01 フタバ産業株式会社 Laser welding apparatus and member manufacturing method
US10830943B2 (en) * 2017-10-31 2020-11-10 Corning Incorporated Optical fibers and optical systems comprising the same
EP3521483A1 (en) * 2018-02-06 2019-08-07 Nederlandse Organisatie voor toegepast- natuurwetenschappelijk onderzoek TNO Lift deposition apparatus and method
WO2019191474A1 (en) * 2018-03-29 2019-10-03 Corning Incorporated Methods for laser processing rough transparent workpieces using pulsed laser beam focal lines and a fluid film
JP6534470B1 (en) * 2018-03-30 2019-06-26 株式会社フジクラ Irradiation apparatus, metal forming apparatus, metal forming system, irradiation method, and method of manufacturing metal form
US11167375B2 (en) 2018-08-10 2021-11-09 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York Additive manufacturing processes and additively manufactured products
CN108931535B (en) * 2018-09-11 2021-01-05 大连理工大学 Online monitoring method for laser additive manufacturing pore defects
DE112019004246T5 (en) * 2018-11-12 2021-05-27 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Ltd. OPTICAL FIBER STRUCTURES AND METHODS FOR BEAM SHAPING
KR20210095688A (en) * 2018-12-03 2021-08-02 아이피지 포토닉스 코포레이션 Ultra-high fiber laser system with controllable output beam intensity profile
CN115718372A (en) * 2018-12-20 2023-02-28 江苏睿赛光电科技有限公司 Side pump signal beam combiner for realizing flat-top light beam and preparation method thereof
EP3903133A4 (en) * 2018-12-28 2022-09-21 NLIGHT, Inc. Optical fiber devices and methods for suppressing stimulated raman scattering (srs)
US20220072731A1 (en) * 2019-01-29 2022-03-10 Suk Man BAE Optical fiber processing apparatus
US11839914B1 (en) * 2019-01-31 2023-12-12 Freeform Future Corp. Process monitoring and feedback for metal additive manufacturing using powder-bed fusion
CN109802287B (en) * 2019-03-20 2020-02-07 中国人民解放军国防科技大学 Three-dimensional self-cooling laser optical tweezers device and method based on lens combination
CN113891777A (en) * 2019-03-28 2022-01-04 松下知识产权经营株式会社 Material processing using high frequency beam shaping
WO2020217204A1 (en) * 2019-04-26 2020-10-29 Junora Ltd Systems and methods for additive manufacturing of recyclable sputtering targets
US10935720B2 (en) * 2019-04-29 2021-03-02 Ii-Vi Delaware, Inc. Laser beam product parameter adjustments
JP2020190689A (en) * 2019-05-23 2020-11-26 三菱重工業株式会社 Transmission fiber, laser machining device and laser transmission method
DE102019116798A1 (en) * 2019-06-21 2020-12-24 Trumpf Laser- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh Method for machining at least one workpiece
DE112020003053T5 (en) 2019-06-24 2022-08-11 Nlight, Inc. Functionally homogenized intensity distribution for additive manufacturing or other industrial laser processing applications
US11005227B2 (en) 2019-09-05 2021-05-11 Nufern Multi-wavelength adjustable-radial-mode fiber laser
JP7090056B2 (en) * 2019-09-06 2022-06-23 株式会社フジクラ Optical fiber, laser generator, laser processing device, and method for manufacturing optical fiber
CN110488503B (en) * 2019-09-24 2024-02-27 上海飞博激光科技股份有限公司 Point ring laser output structure with adjustable beam energy distribution
JP7257540B2 (en) * 2019-09-30 2023-04-13 株式会社フジクラ Optical combiner and laser device
JP2021086838A (en) * 2019-11-25 2021-06-03 株式会社フジクラ Laser device
WO2021125162A1 (en) * 2019-12-17 2021-06-24 株式会社フジクラ Beam quality control device and laser device using same
JP2021096370A (en) * 2019-12-17 2021-06-24 株式会社フジクラ Beam quality controlling device and laser device using the same
US11340467B2 (en) * 2020-02-18 2022-05-24 Lumentum Operations Llc Optical fiber for generating rotary optical beams
JP2021148545A (en) * 2020-03-18 2021-09-27 株式会社ディスコ Inspection apparatus and inspection method
JP2021188070A (en) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-13 三菱重工業株式会社 Lamination modeling method and lamination modeling apparatus
JP7441129B2 (en) 2020-06-25 2024-02-29 株式会社フジクラ fiber laser equipment
US20220009036A1 (en) * 2020-07-07 2022-01-13 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co. Ltd Laser systems and techniques for workpiece processing utilizing optical fibers and multiple beams
WO2022015876A1 (en) * 2020-07-14 2022-01-20 Nlight, Inc. Single mode beam
CN112379539A (en) * 2020-11-18 2021-02-19 联合微电子中心有限责任公司 Silicon-based micro-ring modulator and modulation method thereof
US11592612B2 (en) * 2020-12-30 2023-02-28 Lumentum Operations Llc In-fiber offset to annulus converter
CN113050289B (en) * 2021-03-04 2022-04-08 武汉光迅科技股份有限公司 All-optical shaper and parameter determination method and device thereof
CN113116516A (en) * 2021-04-01 2021-07-16 广州迪光医学科技有限公司 Laser coupling device
CN113305450A (en) * 2021-06-09 2021-08-27 广东宏石激光技术股份有限公司 Laser processing device with adjustable processing quality and processing method thereof
CN113478082B (en) * 2021-07-15 2022-05-20 南京航空航天大学 Flexible laser welding method and device for skin-stringer
US11693176B2 (en) * 2021-09-30 2023-07-04 Lumentum Operations Llc In-fiber beam scanning
WO2023056435A1 (en) * 2021-10-01 2023-04-06 Nlight, Inc. Selectable gaussian and ring beam characteristics
CN113857492B (en) * 2021-10-09 2023-08-22 华中科技大学鄂州工业技术研究院 Self-disturbance laser additive manufacturing method
CN113665101A (en) * 2021-10-21 2021-11-19 广东职业技术学院 FDM printing method and FDM printer
WO2023097302A1 (en) 2021-11-24 2023-06-01 Nlight, Inc. All-fiber laser beam tuning by adjustment of angular intensity distribution
CN113889830B (en) * 2021-12-03 2022-02-25 武汉锐科光纤激光技术股份有限公司 Method, device and apparatus for generating light beam, storage medium and electronic apparatus
WO2023196381A1 (en) * 2022-04-05 2023-10-12 Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Graded index structure for optical components with reduced polarization aberrations
WO2024003551A1 (en) 2022-06-29 2024-01-04 Trumpf Laser Uk Limited Apparatus for laser processing a material
WO2024026457A1 (en) * 2022-07-29 2024-02-01 Applied Materials, Inc. Time delay integration acquisition for spatial genomics imaging
WO2024031069A1 (en) * 2022-08-04 2024-02-08 Applied Materials, Inc. High-throughput spatial imaging system for biological samples

Family Cites Families (580)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2192171A (en) 1938-06-06 1940-03-05 Adirondack Foundries And Steel Car truck
US3388461A (en) 1965-01-26 1968-06-18 Sperry Rand Corp Precision electrical component adjustment method
GB1502127A (en) * 1975-01-27 1978-02-22 Xerox Corp Geometrical transformations in optics
US4315666A (en) 1979-03-19 1982-02-16 Hicks Jr John W Coupled communications fibers
US4266851A (en) * 1979-11-06 1981-05-12 International Telephone And Telegraph Corporation Coupler for a concentric core optical fiber
US4252403A (en) 1979-11-06 1981-02-24 International Telephone And Telegraph Corporation Coupler for a graded index fiber
DE3036618A1 (en) * 1980-09-29 1982-05-19 Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München CONTROL ELEMENT FOR CONTROLLING A LIGHT TRANSMISSION BETWEEN LIGHTWAVE GUIDES
US4475789A (en) 1981-11-09 1984-10-09 Canadian Patents & Development Limited Optical fiber power tap
US4475027A (en) * 1981-11-17 1984-10-02 Allied Corporation Optical beam homogenizer
JPS5974854U (en) 1982-11-08 1984-05-21 石川島播磨重工業株式会社 centrifuge
DE3410913A1 (en) 1984-03-24 1985-10-03 Trumpf GmbH & Co, 7257 Ditzingen MACHINE TOOL FOR MECHANICAL AND LASER BEAM PROCESSING OF A WORKPIECE
US4713518A (en) 1984-06-08 1987-12-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electronic device manufacturing methods
JPS6046892A (en) * 1984-07-19 1985-03-13 Toshiba Corp Irradiating method of laser light
US4614868A (en) 1984-10-12 1986-09-30 Caterpillar Industrial Inc. Fiber optic seam tracking apparatus
US4768854A (en) * 1985-07-11 1988-09-06 Raychem Corp. Optical fiber distribution network including nondestructive taps and method using same
FR2597971B1 (en) * 1986-04-24 1990-10-19 Photonetics FIBER OPTIC SENSOR
US4953947A (en) * 1986-08-08 1990-09-04 Corning Incorporated Dispersion transformer having multichannel fiber
US4863538A (en) 1986-10-17 1989-09-05 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Method and apparatus for producing parts by selective sintering
RU2021881C1 (en) 1986-10-17 1994-10-30 Борд оф Риджентс, Дзе Юниверсити оф Тексас Систем Method to produce a part and the device to fulfill it
US4770492A (en) * 1986-10-28 1988-09-13 Spectran Corporation Pressure or strain sensitive optical fiber
US4915468A (en) 1987-02-20 1990-04-10 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Apparatus using two-mode optical waveguide with non-circular core
JP2580148B2 (en) * 1987-03-05 1997-02-12 株式会社トプコン Optical mixer
JPH07113922B2 (en) 1987-04-14 1995-12-06 富士通株式会社 Machine translation device
US5073048A (en) * 1987-07-06 1991-12-17 Asahi Kogaku Kogyo K.K. Optical fiber bundle
US5008555A (en) 1988-04-08 1991-04-16 Eaton Leonard Technologies, Inc. Optical probe with overlapping detection fields
US5082349A (en) 1988-04-25 1992-01-21 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Bi-domain two-mode single crystal fiber devices
DE3833992A1 (en) 1988-10-06 1990-04-12 Messerschmitt Boelkow Blohm RADIATION DEVICE
JPH0748330B2 (en) 1989-02-21 1995-05-24 帝国通信工業株式会社 Electronic component resin molded case with built-in flexible substrate and method of manufacturing the same
US5153773A (en) 1989-06-08 1992-10-06 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Illumination device including amplitude-division and beam movements
ATE114195T1 (en) 1989-08-14 1994-12-15 Ciba Geigy Ag FIBER OPTIC CONNECTION.
US5129014A (en) 1989-12-08 1992-07-07 Xerox Corporation Image registration
JPH03216287A (en) * 1990-01-19 1991-09-24 Fanuc Ltd Laser beam cutting method
US5231464A (en) * 1990-03-26 1993-07-27 Research Development Corporation Of Japan Highly directional optical system and optical sectional image forming apparatus employing the same
RU2008742C1 (en) 1991-03-04 1994-02-28 Рыков Вениамин Васильевич Process of doping of semiconductors
GB9106874D0 (en) 1991-04-02 1991-05-22 Lumonics Ltd Optical fibre assembly for a laser system
US6569382B1 (en) 1991-11-07 2003-05-27 Nanogen, Inc. Methods apparatus for the electronic, homogeneous assembly and fabrication of devices
US5252991A (en) 1991-12-17 1993-10-12 Hewlett-Packard Company Media edge sensor utilizing a laser beam scanner
DE4200587C1 (en) 1992-01-11 1993-04-01 Schott Glaswerke, 6500 Mainz, De Light wave applicator for cutting and coagulating biological tissue - applies laser beam via flexible optical fibre having non-constant refractive index profile along its cross=section
US5475415A (en) * 1992-06-03 1995-12-12 Eastman Kodak Company Optical head and printing system forming interleaved output laser light beams
JP2962937B2 (en) 1992-07-14 1999-10-12 キヤノン株式会社 Character processing apparatus and method
US5295211A (en) * 1993-01-07 1994-03-15 Corning Incorporated Fiber amplifier coupler
JP3175994B2 (en) 1993-04-15 2001-06-11 松下電工株式会社 Laser irradiation method and laser irradiation apparatus, and three-dimensional circuit forming method, surface treatment method, and powder adhering method
JP3346617B2 (en) * 1993-10-19 2002-11-18 オリンパス光学工業株式会社 Image fiber
RU2111520C1 (en) 1993-07-21 1998-05-20 Фирма "Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд." Optical processor with booster input
US5393482A (en) 1993-10-20 1995-02-28 United Technologies Corporation Method for performing multiple beam laser sintering employing focussed and defocussed laser beams
US5427733A (en) 1993-10-20 1995-06-27 United Technologies Corporation Method for performing temperature-controlled laser sintering
GB9403122D0 (en) 1994-02-18 1994-04-06 Univ Southampton Acousto-optic device
JP3531199B2 (en) 1994-02-22 2004-05-24 三菱電機株式会社 Optical transmission equipment
US5656186A (en) 1994-04-08 1997-08-12 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Method for controlling configuration of laser induced breakdown and ablation
US5523543A (en) 1994-09-09 1996-06-04 Litel Instruments Laser ablation control system and method
US5509597A (en) 1994-10-17 1996-04-23 Panasonic Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method for automatic monitoring and control of a soldering process
DE4437284A1 (en) 1994-10-18 1996-04-25 Eos Electro Optical Syst Method for calibrating a controller to deflect a laser beam
US5566196A (en) * 1994-10-27 1996-10-15 Sdl, Inc. Multiple core fiber laser and optical amplifier
JPH08150485A (en) 1994-11-28 1996-06-11 Komatsu Ltd Laser marking device
US5642198A (en) 1995-04-03 1997-06-24 Long; William R. Method of inspecting moving material
US5903696A (en) 1995-04-21 1999-05-11 Ceramoptec Industries Inc Multimode optical waveguides, waveguide components and sensors
JP3050102B2 (en) 1995-09-29 2000-06-12 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Light beam focal position detection device, light beam irradiation device, and light beam recording device
US5748824A (en) 1995-11-17 1998-05-05 Corning Incorporated Positive dispersion optical waveguide
US5932119A (en) 1996-01-05 1999-08-03 Lazare Kaplan International, Inc. Laser marking system
US5719386A (en) 1996-02-07 1998-02-17 Umax Data Systems, Inc. High efficiency multi-image scan method
US5909306A (en) 1996-02-23 1999-06-01 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Solid-state spectrally-pure linearly-polarized pulsed fiber amplifier laser system useful for ultraviolet radiation generation
US5745284A (en) 1996-02-23 1998-04-28 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Solid-state laser source of tunable narrow-bandwidth ultraviolet radiation
JP3369404B2 (en) * 1996-06-14 2003-01-20 三菱電機株式会社 Light trigger thyristor
US5761234A (en) 1996-07-09 1998-06-02 Sdl, Inc. High power, reliable optical fiber pumping system with high redundancy for use in lightwave communication systems
US5837962A (en) * 1996-07-15 1998-11-17 Overbeck; James W. Faster laser marker employing acousto-optic deflection
US5864430A (en) * 1996-09-10 1999-01-26 Sandia Corporation Gaussian beam profile shaping apparatus, method therefor and evaluation thereof
UA47454C2 (en) * 1996-12-20 2002-07-15 Научний Центр Волоконной Оптікі Прі Інстітутє Общєй Фізікі Россійской Акадєміі Наук Fiber converter of the mode field diameter, method for local chanche of the refractive index of the optical waveguides and a method for preparing raw stock for optical waveguides
US5986807A (en) 1997-01-13 1999-11-16 Xerox Corporation Single binary optical element beam homogenizer
EP1284247B1 (en) 1997-02-14 2004-08-11 Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation Tellurite glass, optical amplifier and light source
JPH10282450A (en) * 1997-04-02 1998-10-23 Nippon Steel Corp Binary optics and laser beam machining device
TW434193B (en) * 1997-05-01 2001-05-16 Sumitomo Electric Industries Method of producing optical fiber grating
JPH10321502A (en) 1997-05-16 1998-12-04 Nikon Corp Charged particle beam projection method
DE19723269A1 (en) 1997-06-03 1998-12-10 Heidelberger Druckmasch Ag Solid state lasers with one or more pump light sources
US6266462B1 (en) * 1998-02-12 2001-07-24 Ultraband Fiber Optics Acousto-optic filter
JPH11780A (en) 1997-06-10 1999-01-06 Ishikawajima Harima Heavy Ind Co Ltd Laser water jet composite cutting device
EP0886174A3 (en) 1997-06-18 2001-03-07 Nippon Telegraph And Telephone Corporation White optical pulse source and applications
US5818630A (en) 1997-06-25 1998-10-06 Imra America, Inc. Single-mode amplifiers and compressors based on multi-mode fibers
US6477301B1 (en) * 1997-06-26 2002-11-05 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Micro-optic coupler incorporating a tapered fiber
DE19746171C2 (en) 1997-10-18 2001-05-17 Deutsche Telekom Ag Device for decoupling signals from an optical waveguide
DE19782307T1 (en) 1997-12-26 2001-02-01 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Laser processing machine
JP3966978B2 (en) * 1998-02-10 2007-08-29 株式会社フジクラ Optical filter and optical communication system
WO1999045419A1 (en) * 1998-03-04 1999-09-10 Sdl, Inc. Optical couplers for multimode fibers
US6180912B1 (en) * 1998-03-31 2001-01-30 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Fan-out beams for repairing an open defect
JP3396422B2 (en) 1998-04-01 2003-04-14 日本電信電話株式会社 Optical fiber connection method and connection device
JP3389101B2 (en) 1998-06-03 2003-03-24 日本電信電話株式会社 Optical fiber connector and optical amplifier using the optical fiber connector
CA2242139A1 (en) * 1998-06-29 1999-12-29 Automated Welding Systems Incorporated Method of laser welding tailored blanks
US6490376B1 (en) 1998-09-17 2002-12-03 Metrologic Instruments, Inc. Skew processing of raster scan images
US6275630B1 (en) 1998-11-17 2001-08-14 Bayspec, Inc. Compact double-pass wavelength multiplexer-demultiplexer
US6310995B1 (en) 1998-11-25 2001-10-30 University Of Maryland Resonantly coupled waveguides using a taper
CN1329723A (en) 1998-12-02 2002-01-02 康宁股份有限公司 A detachable plug-in pump card assembly
US6282341B1 (en) * 1998-12-22 2001-08-28 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Tunable, mechanically induced long-period fiber grating with enhanced polarizing characteristics
FR2787986B1 (en) 1998-12-31 2001-03-02 Maurice Granger DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE EXIT OF A CUTTING BLADE OF A DRUM IN A WIPER MATERIAL DISPENSING APPARATUS
US6192171B1 (en) * 1999-02-26 2001-02-20 Albert Goodman Dynamic fiber optic switch with artificial muscle
US6483973B1 (en) 1999-04-09 2002-11-19 Fitel Usa Corp. Cladding member for optical fibers and optical fibers formed with the cladding member
TW482705B (en) 1999-05-28 2002-04-11 Electro Scient Ind Inc Beam shaping and projection imaging with solid state UV Gaussian beam to form blind vias
US6304704B1 (en) 1999-07-27 2001-10-16 Lucent Technologies Inc. Mode mixing buffered optical fiber apparatus and method for making
US6839163B1 (en) 1999-09-01 2005-01-04 Avanex Corporation Apparatus and method for making an optical fiber amplifier
NO994363L (en) * 1999-09-09 2001-03-12 Optomed As Fiber optic probe for temperature measurements in biological media
TW440728B (en) * 1999-11-04 2001-06-16 Ind Tech Res Inst A tunable fiber grating
US6362004B1 (en) 1999-11-09 2002-03-26 Packard Biochip Technologies, Llc Apparatus and method for using fiducial marks on a microarray substrate
JP3521326B2 (en) * 1999-12-07 2004-04-19 株式会社日立製作所 Optical fiber, optical receiving device and optical transmitting device
CA2293132C (en) 1999-12-24 2007-03-06 Jocelyn Lauzon Triple-clad rare-earth doped optical fiber and applications
US7068900B2 (en) 1999-12-24 2006-06-27 Croteau Andre Multi-clad doped optical fiber
US6600149B2 (en) * 1999-12-27 2003-07-29 Whitten L. Schulz Fiber grating environmental sensing system
US6330382B1 (en) 2000-01-19 2001-12-11 Corning Incorporated Mode conditioning for multimode fiber systems
US7098084B2 (en) 2000-03-08 2006-08-29 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof
US6496301B1 (en) 2000-03-10 2002-12-17 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Helical fiber amplifier
US6407363B2 (en) 2000-03-30 2002-06-18 Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. Laser system and method for single press micromachining of multilayer workpieces
US6947802B2 (en) * 2000-04-10 2005-09-20 Hypertherm, Inc. Centralized control architecture for a laser materials processing system
US6559585B2 (en) 2000-05-26 2003-05-06 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Color cathode ray tube
JP4619507B2 (en) * 2000-09-26 2011-01-26 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 Optical fiber coupling device, wavelength tunable device, pressure sensor, acceleration sensor, and optical device
US6477307B1 (en) 2000-10-23 2002-11-05 Nufern Cladding-pumped optical fiber and methods for fabricating
ATE301620T1 (en) * 2000-12-15 2005-08-15 Lzh Laserzentrum Hannover Ev METHOD FOR CUTTING COMPONENTS MADE OF GLASS, CERAMIC, GLASS CERAMIC OR THE LIKE BY GENERATING A THERMAL STRESS CRACK ON THE COMPONENT ALONG A CUTTING ZONE
US7193771B1 (en) 2001-01-04 2007-03-20 Lockheed Martin Coherent Technologies, Inc. Power scalable optical systems for generating, transporting, and delivering high power, high quality laser beams
US6621044B2 (en) 2001-01-18 2003-09-16 Anvik Corporation Dual-beam materials-processing system
JP2002214460A (en) 2001-01-19 2002-07-31 Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd Optical waveguide device and its manufacturing method
AU2002240145B2 (en) * 2001-01-25 2006-06-29 Omniguide, Inc. Low-loss photonic crystal waveguide having large core radius
EP1366383A1 (en) * 2001-01-25 2003-12-03 Omniguide Communications Inc. Photonic crystal optical waveguides having tailored dispersion profiles
US6563981B2 (en) 2001-01-31 2003-05-13 Omniguide Communications Electromagnetic mode conversion in photonic crystal multimode waveguides
US6360042B1 (en) * 2001-01-31 2002-03-19 Pin Long Tunable optical fiber gratings device
US6711918B1 (en) 2001-02-06 2004-03-30 Sandia National Laboratories Method of bundling rods so as to form an optical fiber preform
US20020110328A1 (en) 2001-02-14 2002-08-15 Bischel William K. Multi-channel laser pump source for optical amplifiers
US6542665B2 (en) 2001-02-17 2003-04-01 Lucent Technologies Inc. GRIN fiber lenses
US6426840B1 (en) 2001-02-23 2002-07-30 3D Systems, Inc. Electronic spot light control
US6724528B2 (en) 2001-02-27 2004-04-20 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Polarization-maintaining optical fiber amplifier employing externally applied stress-induced birefringence
JP3399434B2 (en) 2001-03-02 2003-04-21 オムロン株式会社 Method for forming plating of polymer molding material, circuit forming part, and method for manufacturing this circuit forming part
EP1238745A3 (en) 2001-03-07 2004-06-30 Nec Corporation Galvanometer controller and laser machining apparatus
US6639177B2 (en) * 2001-03-29 2003-10-28 Gsi Lumonics Corporation Method and system for processing one or more microstructures of a multi-material device
WO2002079829A1 (en) 2001-03-30 2002-10-10 Optical Power Systems Ring core fiber
US20020168139A1 (en) 2001-03-30 2002-11-14 Clarkson William Andrew Optical fiber terminations, optical couplers and optical coupling methods
US6556340B1 (en) 2001-04-06 2003-04-29 Onetta, Inc. Optical amplifiers and upgrade modules
EP1381894A1 (en) * 2001-04-11 2004-01-21 Crystal Fibre A/S Dual core photonic crystal fibers (pcf) with special dispersion properties
EP1393105A4 (en) * 2001-04-12 2006-03-22 Omniguide Inc High index-contrast fiber waveguides and applications
US7009140B2 (en) 2001-04-18 2006-03-07 Cymer, Inc. Laser thin film poly-silicon annealing optical system
US6597829B2 (en) 2001-04-27 2003-07-22 Robert H. Cormack 1xN optical fiber switch
EP1260841B1 (en) 2001-05-19 2007-07-11 Lucent Technologies Inc. GRIN fiber lenses
US6831934B2 (en) * 2001-05-29 2004-12-14 Apollo Instruments, Inc. Cladding pumped fiber laser
WO2003005081A1 (en) * 2001-07-02 2003-01-16 Acreo Ab Method and device for controlling the refractive index in an optical fiber
EP1421419B1 (en) * 2001-07-12 2007-09-12 OCG Technology Licensing, LLC Optical fiber
US6991939B2 (en) 2001-07-19 2006-01-31 Tufts University Optical array device and methods of use thereof for screening, analysis and manipulation of particles
WO2003019111A1 (en) 2001-08-23 2003-03-06 Zygo Corporation Dynamic interferometric controlling direction of input beam
KR100439088B1 (en) 2001-09-14 2004-07-05 한국과학기술원 Optical coupling module with self-aligned etched grooves and method for fabricating the same
NL1019004C2 (en) * 2001-09-20 2003-03-26 Draka Fibre Technology Bv Multimode fiber with a refractive index profile.
US6866429B2 (en) 2001-09-26 2005-03-15 Np Photonics, Inc. Method of angle fusion splicing silica fiber with low-temperature non-silica fiber
JP2003129862A (en) 2001-10-23 2003-05-08 Toshiba Corp Turbine blade production method
US6825974B2 (en) 2001-11-06 2004-11-30 Sandia National Laboratories Linearly polarized fiber amplifier
US20040097103A1 (en) 2001-11-12 2004-05-20 Yutaka Imai Laser annealing device and thin-film transistor manufacturing method
AU2002366156A1 (en) 2001-11-16 2003-06-10 Optical Power Systems Inc. Multi-wavelength raman fiber laser
US6671293B2 (en) * 2001-11-19 2003-12-30 Chiral Photonics, Inc. Chiral fiber laser apparatus and method
US6819815B1 (en) 2001-12-12 2004-11-16 Calient Networks Method and apparatus for indirect adjustment of optical switch reflectors
JP2003200286A (en) 2001-12-28 2003-07-15 Fujitsu Ltd Laser microspot welding equipment
EP1340583A1 (en) 2002-02-20 2003-09-03 ALSTOM (Switzerland) Ltd Method of controlled remelting of or laser metal forming on the surface of an article
US6768577B2 (en) * 2002-03-15 2004-07-27 Fitel Usa Corp. Tunable multimode laser diode module, tunable multimode wavelength division multiplex raman pump, and amplifier, and a system, method, and computer program product for controlling tunable multimode laser diodes, raman pumps, and raman amplifiers
US7116887B2 (en) 2002-03-19 2006-10-03 Nufern Optical fiber
US6700161B2 (en) 2002-05-16 2004-03-02 International Business Machines Corporation Variable resistor structure and method for forming and programming a variable resistor for electronic circuits
US7067763B2 (en) 2002-05-17 2006-06-27 Gsi Group Corporation High speed, laser-based marking method and system for producing machine readable marks on workpieces and semiconductor devices with reduced subsurface damage produced thereby
JP2004055366A (en) 2002-07-22 2004-02-19 Japan Storage Battery Co Ltd Cordless lamp
US7231063B2 (en) 2002-08-09 2007-06-12 Intersense, Inc. Fiducial detection system
US6816662B2 (en) 2002-09-19 2004-11-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Article for cleaving and polishing optical fiber ends
ITMI20022328A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2004-05-01 Carlo Nobili S P A Rubinetterie MIXING CARTRIDGE FOR SINGLE LEVER MIXER TAPS
US6768750B2 (en) 2002-11-12 2004-07-27 Corning Incorporated Multi-spectral line Raman laser
DE10352590A1 (en) 2002-11-12 2004-05-27 Toptica Photonics Ag Method for manufacturing optical fibre with output point for stray light and measuring fibre optical power, with optical fibre contiguous core , and surrounding sleeve with second lower refraction index, while fibre section
US20040141702A1 (en) * 2002-11-22 2004-07-22 Vladimir Fuflyigin Dielectric waveguide and method of making the same
WO2004049025A1 (en) 2002-11-23 2004-06-10 Crystal Fibre A/S Splicing and connectorization of photonic crystal fibres
JP4112355B2 (en) * 2002-12-11 2008-07-02 日立造船株式会社 Beam forming method and apparatus
KR20050084436A (en) 2002-12-20 2005-08-26 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. A method and a device for laser spot welding
US7099535B2 (en) * 2002-12-31 2006-08-29 Corning Incorporated Small mode-field fiber lens
KR100488461B1 (en) * 2003-03-27 2005-05-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Laser display device
JP4505190B2 (en) 2003-03-27 2010-07-21 新日本製鐵株式会社 Laser cutting device
DE20320269U1 (en) 2003-03-28 2004-04-15 Raylase Ag Optical system with adjustable total length for variable focussing of light (laser) beam, with lens module in light beam path for laser 3D scanners also for writing, marking, cutting
US6963062B2 (en) 2003-04-07 2005-11-08 Eksigent Technologies, Llc Method for multiplexed optical detection including a multimode optical fiber in which propagation modes are coupled
US7050660B2 (en) 2003-04-07 2006-05-23 Eksigent Technologies Llc Microfluidic detection device having reduced dispersion and method for making same
KR100733258B1 (en) 2003-04-17 2007-06-27 니혼 덴산 산쿄 가부시키가이샤 Lens driving apparatus, thin-type camera and mobile telephone attached with camera
DE10321102A1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-12-02 Hentze-Lissotschenko Patentverwaltungs Gmbh & Co.Kg Splitting device for light rays
DE602004031941D1 (en) 2003-05-30 2011-05-05 Olympus Co MEASURING DEVICE COMPRISING A LIGHT RECORDING UNIT
US6801550B1 (en) 2003-05-30 2004-10-05 Bae Systems Information And Electronic Systems Integration Inc. Multiple emitter side pumping method and apparatus for fiber lasers
US20050041697A1 (en) 2003-06-12 2005-02-24 Martin Seifert Portable laser
US6970624B2 (en) 2003-06-13 2005-11-29 Furukawa Electric North America Cladding pumped optical fiber gain devices
US7170913B2 (en) 2003-06-19 2007-01-30 Multiwave Photonics, Sa Laser source with configurable output beam characteristics
GB0314817D0 (en) * 2003-06-25 2003-07-30 Southampton Photonics Ltd Apparatus for providing optical radiation
JP2005046247A (en) 2003-07-31 2005-02-24 Topcon Corp Laser surgery apparatus
JP2005070608A (en) 2003-08-27 2005-03-17 Mitsubishi Cable Ind Ltd Splicing structure of double clad fiber, and multimode fiber and method for splicing the same
US7151787B2 (en) 2003-09-10 2006-12-19 Sandia National Laboratories Backscatter absorption gas imaging systems and light sources therefore
US7016573B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2006-03-21 Imra America, Inc. Optical fiber pump multiplexer
US7738514B2 (en) 2003-12-04 2010-06-15 Optical Air Data Systems, Llc Very high power pulsed fiber laser
GB0328370D0 (en) 2003-12-05 2004-01-14 Southampton Photonics Ltd Apparatus for providing optical radiation
JP2005203430A (en) 2004-01-13 2005-07-28 Mitsubishi Cable Ind Ltd Optical fiber laser and laser beam generating method using the same
JP4555582B2 (en) 2004-02-03 2010-10-06 Hoya株式会社 Lens movement mechanism
US7527977B1 (en) 2004-03-22 2009-05-05 Sandia Corporation Protein detection system
US7349123B2 (en) 2004-03-24 2008-03-25 Lexmark International, Inc. Algorithms and methods for determining laser beam process direction position errors from data stored on a printhead
US7486705B2 (en) * 2004-03-31 2009-02-03 Imra America, Inc. Femtosecond laser processing system with process parameters, controls and feedback
US7804864B2 (en) 2004-03-31 2010-09-28 Imra America, Inc. High power short pulse fiber laser
US7167622B2 (en) * 2004-04-08 2007-01-23 Omniguide, Inc. Photonic crystal fibers and medical systems including photonic crystal fibers
US7231122B2 (en) 2004-04-08 2007-06-12 Omniguide, Inc. Photonic crystal waveguides and systems using such waveguides
JP4544904B2 (en) 2004-04-28 2010-09-15 オリンパス株式会社 Optical system
US7317857B2 (en) * 2004-05-03 2008-01-08 Nufem Optical fiber for delivering optical energy to or from a work object
US20080063017A1 (en) * 2004-06-01 2008-03-13 Trumpf Photonics Inc. Laser Diode Array Mounting
CN1584644A (en) 2004-06-02 2005-02-23 中国科学院上海光学精密机械研究所 Beam shaping optical fibre
CN1249470C (en) * 2004-07-01 2006-04-05 上海交通大学 Passive full optical-fiber adjustable optical tapping element
US7146073B2 (en) 2004-07-19 2006-12-05 Quantronix Corporation Fiber delivery system with enhanced passive fiber protection and active monitoring
US20060024001A1 (en) 2004-07-28 2006-02-02 Kyocera Corporation Optical fiber connected body with mutually coaxial and inclined cores, optical connector for forming the same, and mode conditioner and optical transmitter using the same
JP4344663B2 (en) * 2004-07-28 2009-10-14 京セラ株式会社 Optical connector
JP4519560B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2010-08-04 株式会社メディアプラス Additive manufacturing method
JP4293098B2 (en) 2004-09-15 2009-07-08 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Laser processing method, laser processing equipment, electronic equipment
US8834457B2 (en) 2004-09-22 2014-09-16 Cao Group, Inc. Modular surgical laser systems
JP2006098085A (en) 2004-09-28 2006-04-13 Toyota Motor Corp Texture prediction method of build-up layer
JP4599553B2 (en) 2004-10-01 2010-12-15 国立大学法人北海道大学 Laser processing method and apparatus
WO2006048833A1 (en) 2004-11-05 2006-05-11 Polymer Vision Limited Method for patterning an organic material to concurrently form an insulator and a semiconductor and device formed thereby
JP2006171348A (en) 2004-12-15 2006-06-29 Nippon Steel Corp Semiconductor laser device
ATE527565T1 (en) * 2004-12-30 2011-10-15 Proximion Fiber Systems Ab OPTICAL COUPLER WITH FIBER BRAGG GRID AND FABRY-PEROT CAVITY APPROPRIATE METHOD OF USE
JP4328724B2 (en) 2005-01-17 2009-09-09 富士通株式会社 Optical waveform measuring apparatus and optical waveform measuring method
DE602006012111D1 (en) 2005-03-18 2010-03-25 Univ Danmarks Tekniske OPTICAL MANIPULATION SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE OPTICAL CASES
US7587110B2 (en) * 2005-03-22 2009-09-08 Panasonic Corporation Multicore optical fiber with integral diffractive elements machined by ultrafast laser direct writing
WO2006118312A1 (en) * 2005-05-02 2006-11-09 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Laser irradiation apparatus and laser irradiation method
US7569331B2 (en) 2005-06-01 2009-08-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Conductive patterning
US7643707B2 (en) 2005-07-11 2010-01-05 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Lighting apparatus
CN101233657A (en) 2005-07-28 2008-07-30 松下电器产业株式会社 Laser light source and display device
US7391561B2 (en) * 2005-07-29 2008-06-24 Aculight Corporation Fiber- or rod-based optical source featuring a large-core, rare-earth-doped photonic-crystal device for generation of high-power pulsed radiation and method
US7674719B2 (en) 2005-08-01 2010-03-09 Panasonic Corporation Via hole machining for microwave monolithic integrated circuits
US7218440B2 (en) * 2005-08-25 2007-05-15 Northrop Grumman Corporation Photonic bandgap fiber for generating near-diffraction-limited optical beam comprising multiple coaxial wavelengths
JP4533824B2 (en) 2005-08-30 2010-09-01 株式会社日立製作所 Image input device and calibration method
DE102006042280A1 (en) 2005-09-08 2007-06-06 IMRA America, Inc., Ann Arbor Transparent material scribing comprises using single scan of focused beam of ultrashort laser pulses to simultaneously create surface groove in material and modified region(s) within bulk of material
US9138913B2 (en) 2005-09-08 2015-09-22 Imra America, Inc. Transparent material processing with an ultrashort pulse laser
EP1767743A1 (en) 2005-09-26 2007-03-28 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method to produce a coated gas turbine component having opening holes, apparatus to perform the method and coated turbine blade having cooling holes
US20070075060A1 (en) 2005-09-30 2007-04-05 Shedlov Matthew S Method of manufacturing a medical device from a workpiece using a pulsed beam of radiation or particles having an adjustable pulse frequency
US7928409B2 (en) 2005-10-11 2011-04-19 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of Commerce Real-time, active picometer-scale alignment, stabilization, and registration in one or more dimensions
US7463805B2 (en) 2005-10-20 2008-12-09 Corning Incorporated High numerical aperture optical fiber
US7551813B2 (en) * 2005-11-03 2009-06-23 Gennadii Ivtsenkov Simplified fiber-optic switch for all-optical fiber-optic lines
US7099533B1 (en) 2005-11-08 2006-08-29 Chenard Francois Fiber optic infrared laser beam delivery system
US8071912B2 (en) 2005-11-16 2011-12-06 Technolines, Lp Engineered wood fiber product substrates and their formation by laser processing
US8728387B2 (en) 2005-12-06 2014-05-20 Howmedica Osteonics Corp. Laser-produced porous surface
US7920767B2 (en) 2005-12-27 2011-04-05 Ofs Fitel, Llc Suppression of higher-order modes by resonant coupling in bend-compensated optical fibers
US7783149B2 (en) * 2005-12-27 2010-08-24 Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Large-mode-area optical fibers with reduced bend distortion
US7764854B2 (en) * 2005-12-27 2010-07-27 Ofs Fitel Llc Optical fiber with specialized index profile to compensate for bend-induced distortions
JP2007190560A (en) 2006-01-17 2007-08-02 Miyachi Technos Corp Laser beam machining apparatus
JP2007190566A (en) * 2006-01-17 2007-08-02 Miyachi Technos Corp Fiber laser beam machining apparatus
EP1991606A2 (en) 2006-01-23 2008-11-19 Hitachi Chemical Research Center, Inc. Ionic polymer devices and methods of fabricating the same
CA2533674A1 (en) 2006-01-23 2007-07-23 Itf Technologies Optiques Inc./Itf Optical Technologies Inc. Optical fiber component package for high power dissipation
FR2897007B1 (en) 2006-02-03 2008-04-11 Air Liquide METHOD OF CUTTING WITH A FIBER LASER WITH BEAM PARAMETER CONTROL
US7537395B2 (en) 2006-03-03 2009-05-26 Lockheed Martin Corporation Diode-laser-pump module with integrated signal ports for pumping amplifying fibers and method
US7835608B2 (en) * 2006-03-21 2010-11-16 Lockheed Martin Corporation Method and apparatus for optical delivery fiber having cladding with absorbing regions
US7628865B2 (en) * 2006-04-28 2009-12-08 Asml Netherlands B.V. Methods to clean a surface, a device manufacturing method, a cleaning assembly, cleaning apparatus, and lithographic apparatus
JP5089950B2 (en) 2006-05-30 2012-12-05 株式会社フジクラ Multi-port coupler, optical amplifier and fiber laser
WO2007148127A2 (en) 2006-06-23 2007-12-27 Gsi Group Limited Fibre laser system
US8718411B2 (en) 2006-07-07 2014-05-06 The University Of Sydney Tunable optical supercontinuum enhancement
US7257293B1 (en) * 2006-07-14 2007-08-14 Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. Fiber structure with improved bend resistance
US7880961B1 (en) 2006-08-22 2011-02-01 Sandia Corporation Optical amplifier exhibiting net phase-mismatch selected to at least partially reduce gain-induced phase-matching during operation and method of operation
US7674999B2 (en) 2006-08-23 2010-03-09 Applied Materials, Inc. Fast axis beam profile shaping by collimation lenslets for high power laser diode based annealing system
JP2008068270A (en) 2006-09-12 2008-03-27 Disco Abrasive Syst Ltd Laser beam machine
WO2008052155A2 (en) 2006-10-26 2008-05-02 Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. System for producing optical pulses of a desired wavelength using cherenkov radiation
JPWO2008053915A1 (en) 2006-11-02 2010-02-25 ナブテスコ株式会社 Scanner optical system, laser processing apparatus, and scanner optical apparatus
RU68715U1 (en) 2006-11-20 2007-11-27 Государственное образовательное учреждение высшего профессионального образования "Кубанский государственный университет" (ГОУ ВПО КубГУ) INTEGRAL OPTICAL RADIATION DIVIDER
GB0623835D0 (en) * 2006-11-29 2007-01-10 Cascade Technologies Ltd Multi mode fibre perturber
KR100872281B1 (en) 2006-12-15 2008-12-05 삼성전기주식회사 Semiconductor light emitting device having nano-wire structure and method for fabricating the same
ITMI20070150A1 (en) 2007-01-31 2008-08-01 Univ Pavia METHOD AND OPTICAL DEVICE FOR THE MANIPULATION OF A PARTICLE
US7526166B2 (en) 2007-01-31 2009-04-28 Corning Incorporated High numerical aperture fiber
ATE414585T1 (en) 2007-03-30 2008-12-15 Innolas Gmbh SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED METHOD FOR CORRECTING A LASER BEAM DEFLECTION UNIT
JP4674696B2 (en) 2007-04-03 2011-04-20 日本特殊陶業株式会社 Manufacturing method of spark plug
DE112008000872T5 (en) 2007-04-04 2010-01-28 Mitsubishi Electric Corp. Apparatus and method for laser processing
US8198565B2 (en) * 2007-04-11 2012-06-12 Chrysler Group Llc Laser-welding apparatus and method
WO2008133242A1 (en) 2007-04-25 2008-11-06 Fujikura Ltd. Rare earth-added core optical fiber
JP5489392B2 (en) 2007-05-09 2014-05-14 オリンパス株式会社 Optical system evaluation apparatus, optical system evaluation method, and optical system evaluation program
JP5124225B2 (en) 2007-05-15 2013-01-23 株式会社フジクラ Optical fiber fusion splicing structure
US8404160B2 (en) 2007-05-18 2013-03-26 Applied Nanotech Holdings, Inc. Metallic ink
JP4297952B2 (en) 2007-05-28 2009-07-15 三菱電機株式会社 Laser processing equipment
CN101071926A (en) * 2007-05-30 2007-11-14 天津大学 Active Q-switched full-optical-fiber laser
DE102007063065A1 (en) 2007-05-31 2008-12-04 Lpi Light Power Instruments Gmbh Method and apparatus for probe microscopic examination of a sample
CN101796697A (en) 2007-07-16 2010-08-04 科拉克蒂夫高科技公司 Luminescent device with phosphosilicate glass
EP2179312A1 (en) 2007-07-20 2010-04-28 Corning Incorporated Large-mode-area optical fiber
US7924500B1 (en) * 2007-07-21 2011-04-12 Lockheed Martin Corporation Micro-structured fiber profiles for mitigation of bend-loss and/or mode distortion in LMA fiber amplifiers, including dual-core embodiments
US7876495B1 (en) * 2007-07-31 2011-01-25 Lockheed Martin Corporation Apparatus and method for compensating for and using mode-profile distortions caused by bending optical fibers
JP2009032910A (en) 2007-07-27 2009-02-12 Hitachi Cable Ltd Optical fiber for optical fiber laser, method of manufacturing the same and optical fiber laser
KR100906287B1 (en) * 2007-08-22 2009-07-06 광주과학기술원 Optical Fiber Probe for Side Imaging and Method of Manufacturing the same
JP5735803B2 (en) 2007-08-23 2015-06-17 スリーディー システムズ インコーポレーテッド Automatic shape calibration method using laser scanning reflectometer
US8027557B2 (en) 2007-09-24 2011-09-27 Nufern Optical fiber laser, and components for an optical fiber laser, having reduced susceptibility to catastrophic failure under high power operation
JP5090121B2 (en) 2007-10-01 2012-12-05 オリンパス株式会社 Adjustment device, laser processing device, adjustment method, and adjustment program
US7593435B2 (en) 2007-10-09 2009-09-22 Ipg Photonics Corporation Powerful fiber laser system
RU2467433C2 (en) 2007-10-23 2012-11-20 Конинклейке Филипс Электроникс Н.В. Lighting device, method and system
DE102007052657B4 (en) 2007-11-05 2010-03-11 Raylase Ag Lens device with a displaceable lens and laser scanner system
TWI352215B (en) 2007-11-21 2011-11-11 Ind Tech Res Inst Beam shaping module
RU2365476C1 (en) 2007-11-26 2009-08-27 Государственное Научное Учреждение "Институт Физики Имени Б.И. Степанова Национальной Академии Наук Беларуси" Device of multiway laser processing
JP5201975B2 (en) 2007-12-14 2013-06-05 株式会社キーエンス Laser processing apparatus and laser processing method
US7957438B2 (en) 2007-12-17 2011-06-07 Jds Uniphase Corporation Method and device for monitoring light
BY12235C1 (en) 2007-12-18 2009-08-30
US7778498B2 (en) 2008-02-12 2010-08-17 Ofs Fitel Llc Systems and techniques for generating cylindrical vector beams
US7982161B2 (en) 2008-03-24 2011-07-19 Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. Method and apparatus for laser drilling holes with tailored laser pulses
JP2009248157A (en) 2008-04-08 2009-10-29 Miyachi Technos Corp Laser beam machining method and apparatus
US8238639B2 (en) 2008-04-09 2012-08-07 Cognex Corporation Method and system for dynamic feature detection
JP2011134736A (en) * 2008-11-13 2011-07-07 Panasonic Corp Pulse fiber laser device, image display device and processing device
US20090314752A1 (en) 2008-05-14 2009-12-24 Applied Materials, Inc. In-situ monitoring for laser ablation
US8135275B2 (en) 2008-05-29 2012-03-13 Heismann Fred L Measuring chromatic dispersion in an optical wavelength channel of an optical fiber link
GB2460648A (en) 2008-06-03 2009-12-09 M Solv Ltd Method and apparatus for laser focal spot size control
JP2010015135A (en) 2008-06-03 2010-01-21 Hitachi Cable Ltd Optical waveguide substrate with optical fiber fixation groove, process for its production, stamp for use in this production process, and opto-electronic hybrid integrated module including the optical waveguide substrate
TWI374398B (en) 2008-06-16 2012-10-11 Univ Nat Cheng Kung Method and apparatus for forming 3-d image
EP2288948A4 (en) 2008-06-20 2011-12-28 Gen Hospital Corp Fused fiber optic coupler arrangement and method for use thereof
JP2011525706A (en) 2008-06-25 2011-09-22 コラクティヴ ハイ−テック インコーポレイティド Energy dissipation package for high power optical fiber components
US8139951B2 (en) 2008-06-26 2012-03-20 Igor Samartsev Fiber-optic long-haul transmission system
IT1391337B1 (en) 2008-08-07 2011-12-05 Univ Roma INTEGRATED RADIO-ELECTRIC LOCATION SYSTEM BASED ON NOISY OF WAVE
WO2010016136A1 (en) 2008-08-07 2010-02-11 富士通株式会社 Method of machining film base material and film base material machining apparatus
US9285541B2 (en) * 2008-08-21 2016-03-15 Nlight Photonics Corporation UV-green converting fiber laser using active tapers
US8873134B2 (en) 2008-08-21 2014-10-28 Nlight Photonics Corporation Hybrid laser amplifier system including active taper
US8711471B2 (en) 2008-08-21 2014-04-29 Nlight Photonics Corporation High power fiber amplifier with stable output
US9158070B2 (en) 2008-08-21 2015-10-13 Nlight Photonics Corporation Active tapers with reduced nonlinearity
FR2935916B1 (en) * 2008-09-12 2011-08-26 Air Liquide METHOD AND INSTALLATION FOR LASER CUTTING WITH MODIFICATION OF THE QUALITY FACTOR OF THE LASER BEAM
KR20100045675A (en) 2008-10-24 2010-05-04 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus
JP5301955B2 (en) * 2008-11-13 2013-09-25 オリンパス株式会社 Defect correction device
KR20110089356A (en) 2008-11-19 2011-08-05 어플라이드 머티어리얼스, 인코포레이티드 Laser-scribing tool architecture
CN102292187B (en) 2008-11-21 2015-12-09 普雷茨特两合公司 For monitoring the method and apparatus of the laser processing procedure will implemented on workpiece and there is the laser Machining head of this device
US8270786B2 (en) 2008-11-21 2012-09-18 Ofs Fitel, Llc Optical fiber mode couplers
US8317413B2 (en) 2008-11-25 2012-11-27 Gooch and Hoosego PLC Packaging for fused fiber devices for high power applications
CN101435918B (en) 2008-11-26 2010-04-14 北京交通大学 Tail fiber coupling output device of laser diode array / surface array
US7839901B2 (en) 2008-12-03 2010-11-23 Ipg Photonics Corporation High power fiber laser system with cladding light stripper
KR100982308B1 (en) 2008-12-12 2010-09-15 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Laser system
DE112010000683B4 (en) 2009-02-02 2014-05-15 Mitaka Kohki Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for non-contacting surface measurement
US8526110B1 (en) * 2009-02-17 2013-09-03 Lockheed Martin Corporation Spectral-beam combining for high-power fiber-ring-laser systems
WO2010100268A2 (en) 2009-03-06 2010-09-10 Micronic Laser Systems Ab Lithographic printing system with placement corrections
US8275007B2 (en) 2009-05-04 2012-09-25 Ipg Photonics Corporation Pulsed laser system with optimally configured saturable absorber
CN102549377A (en) 2009-05-21 2012-07-04 三星重工业株式会社 Flat bed scan module, flat bed scan system, jig for measuring alignment errors of a flat bed scan module, and method for measuring alignment errors of a flat bed scan module using same
TWI523720B (en) 2009-05-28 2016-03-01 伊雷克托科學工業股份有限公司 Acousto-optic deflector applications in laser processing of features in a workpiece, and related laser processing method
DE102009026526A1 (en) 2009-05-28 2010-12-02 Robert Bosch Gmbh laser device
US8622625B2 (en) 2009-05-29 2014-01-07 Corning Incorporated Fiber end face void closing method, a connectorized optical fiber assembly, and method of forming same
US8340485B2 (en) * 2009-05-29 2012-12-25 Corning Cable Systems Llc Laser-shaped optical fibers along with optical assemblies and methods therefor
JP5136521B2 (en) * 2009-06-29 2013-02-06 株式会社日立プラントテクノロジー Laser narrow groove welding apparatus and welding method
DE102009027348A1 (en) * 2009-06-30 2011-01-05 Trumpf Laser Gmbh + Co. Kg Optical beam switch
JP5345459B2 (en) * 2009-07-14 2013-11-20 日本電信電話株式会社 Local signal light input / output method and local signal light input / output device
US8593725B2 (en) 2009-08-04 2013-11-26 Jds Uniphase Corporation Pulsed optical source
US8184363B2 (en) * 2009-08-07 2012-05-22 Northrop Grumman Systems Corporation All-fiber integrated high power coherent beam combination
US20110080476A1 (en) 2009-10-02 2011-04-07 Lasx Industries, Inc. High Performance Vision System for Part Registration
US8755649B2 (en) 2009-10-19 2014-06-17 Lockheed Martin Corporation In-line forward/backward fiber-optic signal analyzer
CN101733561B (en) 2009-11-04 2012-04-11 中国科学院长春光学精密机械与物理研究所 Method for quickly and precisely adjusting focal plane in laser trimming membrane resistance
CN102136669A (en) 2009-12-08 2011-07-27 韩国电子通信研究院 Double clad fiber laser device
US8251475B2 (en) 2009-12-14 2012-08-28 Eastman Kodak Company Position detection with two-dimensional sensor in printer
US20130023086A1 (en) 2009-12-21 2013-01-24 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Active matrix substrate, display panel provided with same, and method for manufacturing active matrix substrate
EP2521138A4 (en) 2009-12-28 2015-11-25 Toray Industries Conductive laminated body and touch panel using the same
CA2788591A1 (en) 2010-02-04 2011-08-11 Echelon Laser Systems, Lp Laser etching system and method
US8452145B2 (en) 2010-02-24 2013-05-28 Corning Incorporated Triple-clad optical fibers and devices with triple-clad optical fibers
JP4659137B1 (en) * 2010-03-03 2011-03-30 東洋ガラス株式会社 Side emission device and manufacturing method thereof
US20110305256A1 (en) 2010-03-05 2011-12-15 TeraDiode, Inc. Wavelength beam combining based laser pumps
GB201004544D0 (en) 2010-03-18 2010-05-05 J P Imaging Ltd Improvements in or relating to printing
JP5718449B2 (en) 2010-03-23 2015-05-13 カンブリオス テクノロジーズ コーポレイション Etching pattern formation of transparent conductor with metal nanowires
CN102844942B (en) 2010-03-30 2015-06-10 株式会社藤仓 Light intensity monitoring circuit and fiber laser system
KR20110109771A (en) 2010-03-31 2011-10-06 광주과학기술원 Ito film patterning method, and fabricating method of flexible display device, and flexible display device
JP2011215286A (en) 2010-03-31 2011-10-27 Brother Industries Ltd Scanning optical apparatus
US8243764B2 (en) 2010-04-01 2012-08-14 Tucker Derek A Frequency conversion of a laser beam using a partially phase-mismatched nonlinear crystal
JP2011221191A (en) * 2010-04-07 2011-11-04 Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd Beam uniformizing device and optical processing device
DE102010003750A1 (en) * 2010-04-08 2011-10-13 Trumpf Laser- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh Method and arrangement for changing the beam profile characteristic of a laser beam by means of a multiple-clad fiber
FI20100144A0 (en) * 2010-04-09 2010-04-09 Salcomp Oyj Arrangement and method for reducing capacitive current
WO2011130131A1 (en) 2010-04-12 2011-10-20 Lockheed Martin Corporation Beam diagnostics and feedback system and method for spectrally beam-combined lasers
JP2011237782A (en) * 2010-04-13 2011-11-24 Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd Optical branch element and optical communication system including the same
US8913221B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2014-12-16 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
WO2011146407A2 (en) 2010-05-16 2011-11-24 Fianium, Inc. Tunable pulse width laser
CN201684018U (en) * 2010-05-26 2010-12-29 赵明 Medical laser fiber sleeve with controllable bending angle
CN102388422B (en) 2010-05-28 2013-03-13 信越聚合物株式会社 Transparent conductive film and conductive substrate using the same
WO2011153320A2 (en) 2010-06-02 2011-12-08 University Of Delaware Integrated concentrating photovoltaics
US9052521B2 (en) 2010-06-07 2015-06-09 Prysm, Inc. Optical component calibration system for laser-based display device
US8254417B2 (en) 2010-06-14 2012-08-28 Ipg Photonics Corporation Fiber laser system with controllably alignable optical components thereof
CN101907742B (en) * 2010-06-21 2012-07-11 哈尔滨工程大学 Array optical tweezers based on multicore polarization-preserving fiber and manufacturing method thereof
EP2586108B1 (en) 2010-06-28 2015-01-21 Megaopto Co., Ltd. Laser apparatus
US8027555B1 (en) 2010-06-30 2011-09-27 Jds Uniphase Corporation Scalable cladding mode stripper device
US8509577B2 (en) * 2010-07-02 2013-08-13 St. Jude Medical, Inc. Fiberoptic device with long focal length gradient-index or grin fiber lens
US9658527B2 (en) 2010-07-12 2017-05-23 Carl Zeiss Sms Ltd. Correction of errors of a photolithographic mask using a joint optimization process
EP2598942A4 (en) 2010-07-30 2014-07-23 Univ Leland Stanford Junior Conductive films
CN201783759U (en) 2010-08-24 2011-04-06 上海市激光技术研究所 Optical fiber laser or disc laser dynamic focusing scanning spot trajectory processing system
US8740432B2 (en) 2010-08-25 2014-06-03 Colorado State University Research Foundation Transmission of laser pulses with high output beam quality using step-index fibers having large cladding
KR101405414B1 (en) 2010-08-26 2014-06-11 한국전자통신연구원 optic fiber coupler, manufacturing method of the same and active optic module
JP5694711B2 (en) 2010-09-09 2015-04-01 株式会社アマダミヤチ MOPA fiber laser processing device and laser diode power supply for excitation
CN101934432B (en) * 2010-09-14 2012-06-06 哈尔滨工业大学 Coaxial composite welding method of laser spot welding and resistance spot welding
US8433161B2 (en) 2010-09-21 2013-04-30 Textron Systems Corporation All glass fiber laser cladding mode stripper
US8554037B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2013-10-08 Raydiance, Inc. Hybrid waveguide device in powerful laser systems
JP2012096286A (en) 2010-10-07 2012-05-24 Sumitomo Heavy Ind Ltd Laser irradiation apparatus, laser irradiation method, and insulating film forming apparatus
CA2813869C (en) 2010-10-14 2016-05-17 Fiber Sensys, Inc. Interferometer systems
FI125306B (en) 2010-10-21 2015-08-31 Rofin Sinar Laser Gmbh Packaged fiber optic component and method of manufacture thereof
JP4667535B1 (en) 2010-11-02 2011-04-13 株式会社フジクラ Amplifying optical fiber, and optical fiber amplifier and resonator using the same
US9507084B2 (en) * 2010-12-03 2016-11-29 Ofs Fitel, Llc Single-mode, bend-compensated, large-mode-area optical fibers designed to accomodate simplified fabrication and tighter bends
US9207395B2 (en) 2010-12-03 2015-12-08 Ofs Fitel, Llc Large mode area optical fibers with bend compensation
US9375974B2 (en) 2010-12-09 2016-06-28 Edison Welding Institute, Inc. Polygonal laser scanner and imaging system for coating removal
US20120148823A1 (en) 2010-12-13 2012-06-14 Innovation & Infinity Global Corp. Transparent conductive structure and method of making the same
US20120156458A1 (en) 2010-12-16 2012-06-21 Innovation & Infinity Global Corp. Diffusion barrier structure, transparent conductive structure and method for making the same
WO2012088361A2 (en) * 2010-12-21 2012-06-28 Ofs Fitel, Llc Multicore collimator
US8835804B2 (en) 2011-01-04 2014-09-16 Nlight Photonics Corporation Beam homogenizer
US10095016B2 (en) 2011-01-04 2018-10-09 Nlight, Inc. High power laser system
JP5713688B2 (en) 2011-01-12 2015-05-07 株式会社キーエンス Laser processing system and laser processing apparatus
KR101180289B1 (en) 2011-01-13 2012-09-07 연세대학교 산학협력단 Hybrid photonic crystal fibers and the fabrication method of the same
CN102176104B (en) 2011-01-18 2013-02-27 南京大学 Tunable time domain dual-optical pulse generating method and generator
CN103338880B (en) 2011-01-28 2015-04-22 阿卡姆股份有限公司 Method for production of a three-dimensional body
DE102011003686A1 (en) 2011-02-07 2012-08-09 Trumpf Laser- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh Laser processing device
US9014220B2 (en) 2011-03-10 2015-04-21 Coherent, Inc. High-power CW fiber-laser
US8903211B2 (en) 2011-03-16 2014-12-02 Ofs Fitel, Llc Pump-combining systems and techniques for multicore fiber transmissions
US9534952B2 (en) 2011-04-15 2017-01-03 Bae Systems Information And Electronic Systems Integration Inc. Integrated parameter monitoring in a fiber laser/amplifier
GB2490143B (en) 2011-04-20 2013-03-13 Rolls Royce Plc Method of manufacturing a component
GB2490354A (en) 2011-04-28 2012-10-31 Univ Southampton Laser with axially-symmetric beam profile
DE102011075213B4 (en) 2011-05-04 2013-02-21 Trumpf Laser Gmbh + Co. Kg Laser processing system with an adjustable laser beam in its brilliance
US8974900B2 (en) 2011-05-23 2015-03-10 Carestream Health, Inc. Transparent conductive film with hardcoat layer
US9175183B2 (en) 2011-05-23 2015-11-03 Carestream Health, Inc. Transparent conductive films, methods, and articles
JP6140072B2 (en) 2011-05-31 2017-05-31 古河電気工業株式会社 Laser apparatus and processing apparatus
US9170367B2 (en) * 2011-06-16 2015-10-27 Lawrence Livermore National Security, Llc Waveguides having patterned, flattened modes
JP5688333B2 (en) 2011-06-23 2015-03-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Polymer film, retardation film, polarizing plate, liquid crystal display device, Rth enhancer and merocyanine compound
US8665916B2 (en) 2011-06-29 2014-03-04 Panasonic Corporation Fiber laser
US20130005139A1 (en) 2011-06-30 2013-01-03 Guardian Industries Corp. Techniques for manufacturing planar patterned transparent contact and/or electronic devices including same
US8537871B2 (en) 2011-07-11 2013-09-17 Nlight Photonics Corporation Fiber cladding light stripper
US8804233B2 (en) * 2011-08-09 2014-08-12 Ofs Fitel, Llc Fiber assembly for all-fiber delivery of high energy femtosecond pulses
US8774236B2 (en) 2011-08-17 2014-07-08 Veralas, Inc. Ultraviolet fiber laser system
JP5993456B2 (en) * 2011-08-22 2016-09-14 コーニング インコーポレイテッド Method of manufacturing an optical fiber with controlled refractive index perturbation
FR2980277B1 (en) 2011-09-20 2013-10-11 Commissariat Energie Atomique HIGH-HEAD MICROSTRUCTURE OPTIC FIBER WITH BASIC FIXED MODE, AND METHOD FOR DESIGNING THE SAME, APPLICATION TO LASER MICROFABRICATION
JP5385356B2 (en) 2011-10-21 2014-01-08 株式会社片岡製作所 Laser processing machine
EP2587564A1 (en) 2011-10-27 2013-05-01 Merck Patent GmbH Selective etching of a matrix comprising silver nanowires or carbon nanotubes
DE102011085840B3 (en) 2011-11-07 2013-03-28 Trumpf Laser Gmbh + Co. Kg Device for adjusting a beam profile, laser processing machine and method for producing the device
DE102011119319A1 (en) 2011-11-24 2013-05-29 Slm Solutions Gmbh Optical irradiation device for a plant for the production of three-dimensional workpieces by irradiation of powder layers of a raw material powder with laser radiation
RU2572900C1 (en) 2011-11-29 2016-01-20 Конинклейке Филипс Н.В. Waveguide
US9250390B2 (en) * 2011-12-09 2016-02-02 Lumentum Operations Llc Varying beam parameter product of a laser beam
US9339890B2 (en) 2011-12-13 2016-05-17 Hypertherm, Inc. Optimization and control of beam quality for material processing
JP6113748B2 (en) 2011-12-14 2017-04-12 オーエフエス ファイテル,エルエルシー Bending compensation filter fiber
US9322989B2 (en) 2011-12-14 2016-04-26 Ofs Fitel, Llc Optical fiber with distributed bend compensated filtering
JP6279484B2 (en) 2011-12-19 2018-02-14 アイピージー フォトニクス コーポレーション 980nm high power single mode fiber pump laser system
WO2013095971A1 (en) 2011-12-21 2013-06-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Laser patterning of silver nanowire - based transparent electrically conducting coatings
JP2015510142A (en) * 2012-01-31 2015-04-02 アシメトリック メディカル リミテッド Optical fiber configured to emit radiation by bending
US9911550B2 (en) 2012-03-05 2018-03-06 Apple Inc. Touch sensitive device with multiple ablation fluence values
JP5216151B1 (en) 2012-03-15 2013-06-19 株式会社フジクラ Optical fiber combiner and laser device using the same
US9200899B2 (en) 2012-03-22 2015-12-01 Virtek Vision International, Inc. Laser projection system and method
CN102621628A (en) 2012-03-22 2012-08-01 华中科技大学 Optical fiber with ring-shaped doped layer and preparation method thereof and laser containing optical fiber
JP5815844B2 (en) 2012-03-28 2015-11-17 株式会社フジクラ Fiber optical system and manufacturing method thereof
US8983259B2 (en) * 2012-05-04 2015-03-17 Raytheon Company Multi-function beam delivery fibers and related system and method
US8668372B2 (en) * 2012-05-11 2014-03-11 Empire Technology Development Llc Transparent illumination panels
US8947768B2 (en) 2012-05-14 2015-02-03 Jds Uniphase Corporation Master oscillator—power amplifier systems
RU2528287C2 (en) 2012-05-15 2014-09-10 Открытое Акционерное Общество "Научно-Исследовательский Институт Технического Стекла" Method of fragile non-metallic material laser cutting and device to this end
IL220027A (en) * 2012-05-28 2017-01-31 Rafael Advanced Defense Systems Ltd Method for brightness enhancement and mode maniplulation of a multimode optical fiber
US9484706B1 (en) 2012-06-12 2016-11-01 Nlight, Inc. Tapered core fiber manufacturing methods
US8953914B2 (en) 2012-06-26 2015-02-10 Corning Incorporated Light diffusing fibers with integrated mode shaping lenses
US8754829B2 (en) 2012-08-04 2014-06-17 Paul Lapstun Scanning light field camera and display
US8849078B2 (en) 2012-09-24 2014-09-30 Ipg Photonics Corporation High power laser system with multiport circulator
US9200887B2 (en) 2012-10-12 2015-12-01 Thorlabs, Inc. Compact, low dispersion, and low aberration adaptive optics scanning system
CN102941412A (en) * 2012-10-15 2013-02-27 华中科技大学 Method and device for controlling laser welding seam holes
DE102012219074A1 (en) 2012-10-19 2014-04-24 Trumpf Werkzeugmaschinen Gmbh + Co. Kg Laser cutting machine and method for cutting workpieces of different thickness
WO2014074947A2 (en) 2012-11-08 2014-05-15 Das, Suman Systems and methods for additive manufacturing and repair of metal components
ITVR20120231A1 (en) 2012-11-20 2014-05-21 Sisma Spa MACHINE TO PRODUCE THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS FROM POWDERED MATERIALS
JP5974854B2 (en) * 2012-11-26 2016-08-23 富士通株式会社 Solder joining apparatus and solder joining method
US10314745B2 (en) 2012-11-30 2019-06-11 Amo Development, Llc Automatic centration of a surgical pattern on the apex of a curved patient interface
FI125512B (en) * 2012-12-11 2015-11-13 Rofin Sinar Laser Gmbh Fiber optic shape mixer and method for making it
CN103056513B (en) 2012-12-14 2014-12-10 武汉锐科光纤激光器技术有限责任公司 Laser processing system
US8948218B2 (en) 2012-12-19 2015-02-03 Ipg Photonics Corporation High power fiber laser system with distributive mode absorber
US9776428B2 (en) 2012-12-28 2017-10-03 Shenzhen Pu Ying Innovation Technology Corporation Limited Multi-purpose printer
GB2511923B (en) 2013-01-28 2018-10-03 Lumentum Operations Llc A cladding light stripper and method of manufacturing
US9842665B2 (en) 2013-02-21 2017-12-12 Nlight, Inc. Optimization of high resolution digitally encoded laser scanners for fine feature marking
CN105122387B (en) 2013-02-21 2019-01-11 恩耐公司 non-ablative laser patterning
WO2014133904A1 (en) 2013-02-28 2014-09-04 Ipg Photonics Corporation Low-mode high power fiber combiner
EP2972528B1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2017-11-22 NLIGHT, Inc. Spun non-circular and non-elliptical fibers and apparatuses utilizing the same
EP2969383B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-07-07 Rolls-Royce Corporation Repair of gas turbine engine components
WO2014144630A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Matterfab Corp. Cartridge for an additive manufacturing apparatus and method
CN103173760A (en) 2013-03-18 2013-06-26 张翀昊 Method for improving compactness of 3D (three dimensional) printing metal part by adopting second laser beam
DE102013205029A1 (en) 2013-03-21 2014-09-25 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Method for laser melting with at least one working laser beam
EP2784045A1 (en) 2013-03-29 2014-10-01 Osseomatrix Selective laser sintering/melting process
US8988669B2 (en) 2013-04-23 2015-03-24 Jds Uniphase Corporation Power monitor for optical fiber using background scattering
EP2988904B1 (en) 2013-04-26 2023-08-23 Raytheon Technologies Corporation Selective laser melting system
EP3363579B1 (en) 2013-04-29 2021-11-17 Nuburu, Inc. System for printing to form a three-dimensional object with an optical fibeer
US10663370B2 (en) 2013-05-06 2020-05-26 Vrije Universiteit Brussel Effective structural health monitoring
TWI543830B (en) 2013-05-10 2016-08-01 財團法人工業技術研究院 Visual error correction method
US9496683B1 (en) * 2013-05-17 2016-11-15 Nlight, Inc. Wavelength locking multi-mode diode lasers with core FBG
JP5914411B2 (en) 2013-05-17 2016-05-11 日本電信電話株式会社 Optical fiber side entrance / exit apparatus and method
CN103293594A (en) 2013-06-28 2013-09-11 中国科学院西安光学精密机械研究所 Large-mode-field quartz energy transmitting optical fiber
DE102013215362B4 (en) 2013-08-05 2015-09-03 Trumpf Werkzeugmaschinen Gmbh + Co. Kg Method, computer program product and device for determining a welding depth in laser welding
US9128259B2 (en) 2013-08-16 2015-09-08 Coherent, Inc. Fiber-coupled laser with adjustable beam-parameter-product
DE102013217598A1 (en) 2013-09-04 2015-03-05 MTU Aero Engines AG Device for laser material processing
GB201317974D0 (en) 2013-09-19 2013-11-27 Materialise Nv System and method for calibrating a laser scanning system
US20150096963A1 (en) 2013-10-04 2015-04-09 Gerald J. Bruck Laser cladding with programmed beam size adjustment
CN103490273A (en) 2013-10-10 2014-01-01 武汉锐科光纤激光器技术有限责任公司 High-power optical fiber transmission system
US9442246B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2016-09-13 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and method for optical fiber
CN103521920B (en) 2013-10-16 2015-09-30 江苏大学 A kind of laser processing device without the need to blowing assist gas and method
DE102013017792A1 (en) 2013-10-28 2015-04-30 Cl Schutzrechtsverwaltungs Gmbh Method for producing a three-dimensional component
CN103606803A (en) 2013-11-07 2014-02-26 北京工业大学 Fiber cladding light stripper for high-power fiber laser
US9214781B2 (en) 2013-11-21 2015-12-15 Lockheed Martin Corporation Fiber amplifier system for suppression of modal instabilities and method
US10328685B2 (en) 2013-12-16 2019-06-25 General Electric Company Diode laser fiber array for powder bed fabrication or repair
US10532556B2 (en) 2013-12-16 2020-01-14 General Electric Company Control of solidification in laser powder bed fusion additive manufacturing using a diode laser fiber array
DE102013226298A1 (en) 2013-12-17 2015-06-18 MTU Aero Engines AG Exposure to generative production
EP2893994B1 (en) 2014-01-14 2020-07-15 General Electric Technology GmbH Method for manufacturing a metallic or ceramic component by selective laser melting additive manufacturing
CN106458697B (en) * 2014-01-30 2020-06-30 恩耐公司 Rotating circular core optical fiber
US9435964B2 (en) 2014-02-26 2016-09-06 TeraDiode, Inc. Systems and methods for laser systems with variable beam parameter product
US9366887B2 (en) * 2014-02-26 2016-06-14 TeraDiode, Inc. Systems and methods for laser systems with variable beam parameter product utilizing thermo-optic effects
JP6349410B2 (en) * 2014-02-26 2018-06-27 ビエン チャン, System and method for multi-beam laser array with variable beam parameter product
DE102014203711A1 (en) 2014-02-28 2015-09-03 MTU Aero Engines AG Generation of residual compressive stresses in generative production
US10343237B2 (en) 2014-02-28 2019-07-09 Ipg Photonics Corporation System and method for laser beveling and/or polishing
EP2921285B1 (en) 2014-03-21 2018-05-02 British Telecommunications public limited company Printed apparatus comprising a 3D printed thermionic device and method and apparatus for its manufacture
WO2015146591A1 (en) 2014-03-27 2015-10-01 プライムアースEvエナジー 株式会社 Laser welding device, laser welding method and battery case
JP6359316B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2018-07-18 三菱重工業株式会社 Three-dimensional laminating apparatus and three-dimensional laminating method
JP6254036B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2017-12-27 三菱重工業株式会社 Three-dimensional laminating apparatus and three-dimensional laminating method
US20150283613A1 (en) 2014-04-02 2015-10-08 Arcam Ab Method for fusing a workpiece
JP2015206993A (en) 2014-04-09 2015-11-19 住友電気工業株式会社 Grating manufacturing apparatus and grating manufacturing method
WO2015173026A2 (en) * 2014-05-14 2015-11-19 Koninklijke Philips N.V. A light emitting device
US20160016369A1 (en) 2014-05-21 2016-01-21 University Of South Carolina Novel Additive Manufacturing-Based Electric Poling Process of PVDF Polymer for Piezoelectric Device Applications
US10069271B2 (en) 2014-06-02 2018-09-04 Nlight, Inc. Scalable high power fiber laser
US10618131B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2020-04-14 Nlight, Inc. Laser patterning skew correction
WO2015189883A1 (en) 2014-06-09 2015-12-17 株式会社日立製作所 Laser welding method
US9397466B2 (en) * 2014-07-11 2016-07-19 Nlight, Inc. High power chirally coupled core optical amplification systems and methods
US10310201B2 (en) 2014-08-01 2019-06-04 Nlight, Inc. Back-reflection protection and monitoring in fiber and fiber-delivered lasers
EP3183108B1 (en) 2014-08-20 2020-12-09 Etxe-Tar, S.A. Method and system for additive manufacturing using a light beam
JP6640094B2 (en) 2014-08-28 2020-02-05 古河電気工業株式会社 Laser light irradiation device
TWI526797B (en) 2014-09-02 2016-03-21 三緯國際立體列印科技股份有限公司 Calibration apparatus and calibration method for three dimensional printing apparatus
US9638867B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2017-05-02 Corning Incorporated Skew managed multi-core optical fiber interconnects
EP3206830B1 (en) 2014-10-13 2019-08-07 Trumpf Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG Optical arrangement having a coupling device and a fiber laser arrangement, and method of processing a workpiece using such an optical arrangement
JP5919356B2 (en) 2014-10-15 2016-05-18 株式会社アマダホールディングス Sheet metal processing method using laser light and laser processing apparatus for executing the same
US9634462B2 (en) * 2014-10-15 2017-04-25 Nlight, Inc. Slanted FBG for SRS suppression
CA2964493A1 (en) 2014-10-23 2016-04-28 Coractive High-Tech Inc. Optical fiber assembly with beam shaping component
WO2016066614A1 (en) * 2014-10-27 2016-05-06 Commscope Emea Limited Splice module for fiber blade
US10112262B2 (en) 2014-10-28 2018-10-30 General Electric Company System and methods for real-time enhancement of build parameters of a component
TWM504425U (en) * 2014-11-14 2015-07-01 Wistron Neweb Corp Metal pattern structure having positioning layer
CN107454868B (en) 2014-11-24 2020-01-03 添加剂工业有限公司 Apparatus for producing an article by additive manufacturing and method of calibrating an apparatus
CN104475970B (en) 2014-12-01 2016-06-29 大族激光科技产业集团股份有限公司 A kind of bearing calibration of laser equipment and laser scanning galvanometer array
US10048661B2 (en) 2014-12-17 2018-08-14 General Electric Company Visualization of additive manufacturing process data
US9397464B2 (en) * 2014-12-19 2016-07-19 Lumentum Operations Llc Fiber laser assembly and method of generating light
TWI564099B (en) 2014-12-24 2017-01-01 財團法人工業技術研究院 Composite beam generator and powder melting or sintering method using the same
US20160187646A1 (en) 2014-12-29 2016-06-30 Jonathan S. Ehrmann High-speed optical scanning systems and methods
EP3045300A1 (en) 2015-01-15 2016-07-20 Airbus Operations GmbH Stiffening component and method for manufacturing a stiffening component
US9837783B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2017-12-05 Nlight, Inc. High-power, single-mode fiber sources
CN104570363B (en) * 2015-02-03 2018-06-01 大族激光科技产业集团股份有限公司 A kind of Gaussian laser beam shaping methods and device and precise laser micropore processing device
DE102015103127A1 (en) 2015-03-04 2016-09-08 Trumpf Laser- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh Irradiation system for a device for additive manufacturing
CN104759623B (en) 2015-03-10 2017-06-23 清华大学 Using the increasing material manufacturing device of electron beam laser compound scanning
EP3067132A1 (en) 2015-03-11 2016-09-14 SLM Solutions Group AG Method and apparatus for producing a three-dimensional work piece with thermal focus shift compensation of the laser
WO2016151740A1 (en) 2015-03-23 2016-09-29 技術研究組合次世代3D積層造形技術総合開発機構 Laser heating control mechanism, laser heating control method, laser heating control program, and three-dimensional molding device
US10050404B2 (en) * 2015-03-26 2018-08-14 Nlight, Inc. Fiber source with cascaded gain stages and/or multimode delivery fiber with low splice loss
US9325151B1 (en) * 2015-03-27 2016-04-26 Ofs Fitel, Llc Systems and techniques for compensation for the thermo-optic effect in active optical fibers
GB201505458D0 (en) 2015-03-30 2015-05-13 Renishaw Plc Additive manufacturing apparatus and methods
US9667025B2 (en) 2015-04-06 2017-05-30 Bae Systems Information And Electronic Systems Integration Inc. System and method for increasing power emitted from a fiber laser
RU2611738C2 (en) 2015-04-08 2017-02-28 Иван Владимирович Мазилин Method for application and laser treatment of thermal-protective coating (versions)
US11022760B2 (en) 2015-04-29 2021-06-01 Nlight, Inc. Portable industrial fiber optic inspection scope
US10246742B2 (en) 2015-05-20 2019-04-02 Quantum-Si Incorporated Pulsed laser and bioanalytic system
PL3308202T3 (en) * 2015-06-09 2021-12-20 Corelase Oy Laser processing apparatus and method and an optical component therefor
GB201510220D0 (en) 2015-06-11 2015-07-29 Renishaw Plc Additive manufacturing apparatus and method
US9804326B2 (en) * 2015-06-23 2017-10-31 Corning Incorporated Optical fiber for multimode and single-mode transmission
CN104979748B (en) 2015-06-26 2018-04-27 吉林大学 Femtosecond laser scan power regulation device and method, femtosecond laser system of processing
CN107924023B (en) 2015-07-08 2020-12-01 恩耐公司 Fibers having suppressed center refractive index for increased beam parameter product
CN104999670B (en) 2015-08-25 2017-05-10 长春理工大学 Multi-beam laser interference cross-scale 3D (three dimension) printing system and method
EP3345227B1 (en) 2015-08-31 2019-10-09 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Actuator and sensor device based on electroactive polymer
CN105290610A (en) 2015-09-11 2016-02-03 深圳市生生电子设备有限公司 Optical path focusing device of laser engraving machine
US10768433B2 (en) * 2015-09-24 2020-09-08 Nlight, Inc. Beam parameter product (bpp) control by varying fiber-to-fiber angle
US10207489B2 (en) 2015-09-30 2019-02-19 Sigma Labs, Inc. Systems and methods for additive manufacturing operations
CN113561478B (en) 2015-10-30 2023-06-06 速尔特技术有限公司 Additive manufacturing system and method
US9917410B2 (en) 2015-12-04 2018-03-13 Nlight, Inc. Optical mode filter employing radially asymmetric fiber
CN105383060B (en) 2015-12-07 2017-10-17 济南鲁洋科技有限公司 A kind of 3D printing feed, fluxing and crystallization in motion leveling integrated apparatus
EP3389915B1 (en) 2016-01-19 2021-05-05 NLIGHT, Inc. Method of processing calibration data in 3d laser scanner systems
JP6998311B2 (en) 2016-02-05 2022-02-04 ニューファーン Fiber optic system
DE102016001355B4 (en) 2016-02-08 2022-03-24 Primes GmbH Meßtechnik für die Produktion mit Laserstrahlung Process and device for analyzing laser beams in systems for additive manufacturing
US10153608B2 (en) * 2016-03-18 2018-12-11 Nlight, Inc. Spectrally multiplexing diode pump modules to improve brightness
JP6114431B1 (en) 2016-04-01 2017-04-12 株式会社アマダホールディングス Laser processing machine
CN108780189B (en) 2016-04-06 2021-11-19 特拉迪欧德公司 Optical fiber structure and method for changing laser beam profile
US10114172B2 (en) 2016-06-20 2018-10-30 Ofs Fitel, Llc Multimode beam combiner
CN106180712A (en) 2016-07-19 2016-12-07 梁春永 A kind of double light source metal dust 3 D-printing system and Method of printing
CN206010148U (en) 2016-07-21 2017-03-15 成都福誉科技有限公司 A kind of system of equal control laser power
US10214833B1 (en) 2016-07-22 2019-02-26 National Technology & Engineering Solutions Of Sandia, Llc Additive manufacturing of crystalline materials
JP7068272B2 (en) * 2016-08-04 2022-05-16 トルンプ レーザー ユーケー リミティド Equipment and methods for laser machining materials
DE202016004237U1 (en) 2016-08-17 2016-08-23 Kredig GmbH positioning
CN106312567B (en) 2016-08-26 2019-04-12 长春理工大学 The orthogonal micro-cutting device and method of laser assisted followed automatically with laser spot
US10673198B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-coupled laser with time varying beam characteristics
US10649241B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-12 Nlight, Inc. Multi-function semiconductor and electronics processing
US10677984B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-09 Nlight, Inc. Production of temporally apparent intensity distribution by rapid perturbation of variable beam characteristics optical fiber
US10673197B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-based optical modulator
US20180217412A1 (en) * 2016-09-29 2018-08-02 Nlight, Inc. Multi-wavelength fiber laser
US10663742B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-26 Nlight, Inc. Method and system for cutting a material using a laser having adjustable beam characteristics
US10673199B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-based saturable absorber
US10668535B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Method of forming three-dimensional objects
US10656427B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-19 Nlight, Inc. Multicore fiber-coupled optical probing techniques
US10668567B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Multi-operation laser tooling for deposition and material processing operations
US10690928B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-23 Nlight, Inc. Methods of and systems for heat deposition in additive manufacturing
US10732439B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-08-04 Nlight, Inc. Fiber-coupled device for varying beam characteristics
US10705348B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-07-07 Nlight, Inc. Optical power density control in fiber-coupled laser
CN109791252B (en) * 2016-09-29 2021-06-29 恩耐公司 Adjustable beam characteristics
US10656440B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-19 Nlight, Inc. Fiber optical beam delivery device producing output exhibiting intensity distribution profile having non-zero ellipticity
US10684487B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-16 Nlight, Inc. Frequency-converted optical beams having adjustable beam characteristics
US10751834B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-08-25 Nlight, Inc. Optical beam delivery device formed of optical fibers configured for beam divergence or mode coupling control
US10730785B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-08-04 Nlight, Inc. Optical fiber bending mechanisms
US10670872B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. All-fiber optical beam switch
US10661342B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-26 Nlight, Inc. Additive manufacturing systems and methods for the same
US10739621B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-08-11 Nlight, Inc. Methods of and systems for materials processing using optical beams
US10646963B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-12 Nlight, Inc. Use of variable beam parameters to control a melt pool
US10682726B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-16 Nlight, Inc. Beam modification structures and methods of modifying optical beam characteristics using the beam modification structures
US10663768B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-26 Nlight, Inc. Fiber optical beam delivery device producing selectable intensity profiles
US10663769B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-26 Nlight, Inc. Systems and methods for modifying beam characteristics
US20180281108A1 (en) * 2016-09-29 2018-10-04 Nlight, Inc. Dynamic aspect ratio rectangular laser beams
US10661391B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-05-26 Nlight, Inc. Method of forming pores in three-dimensional objects
US10668537B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2020-06-02 Nlight, Inc. Systems for and methods of temperature control in additive manufacturing
DE102016222186B3 (en) 2016-11-11 2018-04-12 Trumpf Laser- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh Method for calibrating two scanner devices each for positioning a laser beam in an operating field and processing machine for producing three-dimensional components by irradiation of powder layers
DE102017219559A1 (en) 2017-11-03 2019-05-09 Trumpf Laser- Und Systemtechnik Gmbh Method for measuring a base element of a construction cylinder arrangement, with deflection of a measuring laser beam by a scanner optics

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023048920A1 (en) * 2021-09-21 2023-03-30 Nlight, Inc. Acoustically controlled laser system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7186695B2 (en) 2022-12-09
CN115963601A (en) 2023-04-14
EP3630410A4 (en) 2020-12-23
EP3630456A1 (en) 2020-04-08
WO2018217304A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217305A1 (en) 2018-11-29
EP3631919B1 (en) 2023-12-27
WO2018217302A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN110892593B (en) 2021-12-10
WO2018217245A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217290A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN110892304B (en) 2021-11-30
CN110914728A (en) 2020-03-24
CN110959232A (en) 2020-04-03
EP3631915A4 (en) 2020-12-09
US20200319408A9 (en) 2020-10-08
WO2018217285A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217247A1 (en) 2018-11-29
TWI695196B (en) 2020-06-01
EP3631916A1 (en) 2020-04-08
US11886052B2 (en) 2024-01-30
US20190258091A1 (en) 2019-08-22
US20180088358A1 (en) 2018-03-29
KR102498030B1 (en) 2023-02-08
EP3631576A4 (en) 2020-12-23
WO2018217297A1 (en) 2018-11-29
EP3630410A1 (en) 2020-04-08
EP3631547A1 (en) 2020-04-08
US20180088357A1 (en) 2018-03-29
EP3631917A1 (en) 2020-04-08
CN110914015B (en) 2022-01-25
JP2020522014A (en) 2020-07-27
EP3631544A4 (en) 2020-12-09
CN110944787A (en) 2020-03-31
KR20190054141A (en) 2019-05-21
JP7167066B2 (en) 2022-11-08
CN110959232B (en) 2023-05-30
CN110915078A (en) 2020-03-24
JP2019537047A (en) 2019-12-19
EP3630456A4 (en) 2020-12-02
EP3630407B1 (en) 2022-08-17
EP3631546A1 (en) 2020-04-08
WO2018217283A1 (en) 2018-11-29
US11886053B2 (en) 2024-01-30
EP3631543A4 (en) 2021-06-09
US10656330B2 (en) 2020-05-19
EP3631576A1 (en) 2020-04-08
US10295845B2 (en) 2019-05-21
WO2018217309A1 (en) 2018-11-29
EP3631917A4 (en) 2020-12-30
EP3631916A4 (en) 2020-12-23
WO2018063452A1 (en) 2018-04-05
US10663767B2 (en) 2020-05-26
CN110914725A (en) 2020-03-24
US20200333640A1 (en) 2020-10-22
WO2018217296A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217308A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN109791252A (en) 2019-05-21
JP7295037B2 (en) 2023-06-20
WO2018217282A1 (en) 2018-11-29
EP4151338A1 (en) 2023-03-22
EP3631919A4 (en) 2020-12-09
WO2018217306A1 (en) 2018-11-29
TW201819968A (en) 2018-06-01
EP3631919A1 (en) 2020-04-08
WO2018217242A1 (en) 2018-11-29
US20180180803A1 (en) 2018-06-28
CN110892304A (en) 2020-03-17
EP3631547A4 (en) 2020-12-09
EP3631544A1 (en) 2020-04-08
WO2018217243A1 (en) 2018-11-29
US20220404648A1 (en) 2022-12-22
CN110914728B (en) 2022-05-27
WO2018217307A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217303A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN114185176A (en) 2022-03-15
CN110915078B (en) 2021-10-22
US20180180813A1 (en) 2018-06-28
WO2018217246A1 (en) 2018-11-29
EP3519871A1 (en) 2019-08-07
CN110944787B (en) 2021-09-14
CN110892593A (en) 2020-03-17
EP3631915A1 (en) 2020-04-08
US10732440B2 (en) 2020-08-04
WO2018217299A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217279A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN110914015A (en) 2020-03-24
EP3631543A1 (en) 2020-04-08
JP2020523626A (en) 2020-08-06
EP3631543B1 (en) 2023-09-06
EP3631576B1 (en) 2023-07-19
WO2018217293A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN109791252B (en) 2021-06-29
EP3630407A1 (en) 2020-04-08
WO2018217300A1 (en) 2018-11-29
US20200116926A9 (en) 2020-04-16
EP3631546A4 (en) 2021-02-24
JP7431582B2 (en) 2024-02-15
JP2020522013A (en) 2020-07-27
US20180088343A1 (en) 2018-03-29
JP2020522012A (en) 2020-07-27
WO2018217298A1 (en) 2018-11-29
WO2018217278A1 (en) 2018-11-29
CN110914725B (en) 2023-02-14
US10423015B2 (en) 2019-09-24
US10877220B2 (en) 2020-12-29
WO2018217301A1 (en) 2018-11-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210286200A1 (en) Methods of and systems for processing using adjustable beam characteristics
US10646963B2 (en) Use of variable beam parameters to control a melt pool
US10668535B2 (en) Method of forming three-dimensional objects
US10668537B2 (en) Systems for and methods of temperature control in additive manufacturing
US10661391B2 (en) Method of forming pores in three-dimensional objects
US10670872B2 (en) All-fiber optical beam switch
US10663742B2 (en) Method and system for cutting a material using a laser having adjustable beam characteristics
US20180239154A1 (en) Optical power density control in fiber-coupled laser
US10661342B2 (en) Additive manufacturing systems and methods for the same
US20180281108A1 (en) Dynamic aspect ratio rectangular laser beams
US10663769B2 (en) Systems and methods for modifying beam characteristics
US10739621B2 (en) Methods of and systems for materials processing using optical beams
US10690928B2 (en) Methods of and systems for heat deposition in additive manufacturing
WO2018217277A1 (en) Methods of and systems for heat deposition in additive manufacturing

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: NLIGHT, INC., WASHINGTON

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:NLIGHT PHOTONICS CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:054828/0482

Effective date: 20160111

Owner name: NLIGHT PHOTONICS CORPORATION, WASHINGTON

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:GROSS, KEN;VICTOR, BRIAN;MARTINSEN, ROBERT;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20180326 TO 20180420;REEL/FRAME:054723/0612

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

AS Assignment

Owner name: PACIFIC WESTERN BANK, NORTH CAROLINA

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:NLIGHT, INC.;REEL/FRAME:059963/0032

Effective date: 20211117

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION